JP7088684B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined prize according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified.

This type of slot machine is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is fixedly set by an upper limit value such as the number of payouts in the advantageous state, apart from the end condition that is variably determined. Even if the end condition that is variably determined after the start of the advantageous state is not satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated by the fixedly set end condition. That is, it has been proposed that the limiter function in an advantageous state is provided so that the gambling property is not excessively increased (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-116915

It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine improved in a configuration in which the advantageous section ends according to a numerical value updated in the advantageous section.

In order to solve the above problems, the slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention is used.
Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
An advantageous section transition means for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player,
A net increase counting means for counting the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value given to the player.
At least one of the first condition that is satisfied in the advantageous section and the second condition that is satisfied based on the fact that the net increase in the game value up to the present starting from the specific opportunity after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. When the condition of is satisfied, the advantageous section ending means for terminating the advantageous section and shifting to the normal section, and
Equipped with
The specific opportunity is an opportunity for the net increase in the game value to increase from the situation where the net increase in the game value is smaller than 0 after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section .
The advantageous section ending means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied, a net increase in the game value is given. After the process of updating based on the game value and the used game value is performed, it is determined whether or not the second condition is satisfied based on the net increase in the updated game value, and the first condition is determined. When it is determined that one condition is satisfied, the process of updating the net increase in the game value is not performed, nor is it determined whether or not the second condition is satisfied, and the advantageous section is terminated. Shift to the normal section
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the net increase in the game value starting from the start of the advantageous section does not exceed the predetermined number, the net increase in the game value after the game value starts to increase is predetermined. If the number exceeds the number, the advantageous section will end, so not only the net increase in the game value during the advantageous section but also the net increase in the game value after the start of the advantageous section will be within the range based on the predetermined number. Can be restricted.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery target combination and the combination number of an internal lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution mode of a navigation notification and a navigation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the game auxiliary display and the advantageous section effect lamp in each game section. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED and the advantageous section effect lamp in an error state and a setting confirmation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED and the advantageous section effect lamp when the power supply to a slot machine is stopped. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED and the advantageous section effect lamp when the power supply to a slot machine is restarted. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the ball ejection control process performed by a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the AT state management processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the medal payout process performed by a main control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the processing at the time of a re-game operation performed by a main control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of a timer interrupt process (main) performed by a main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display and the input request LED at the start of an advantageous section. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display, the input request LED, and the replaying LED at the start of an advantageous section. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display and the input request LED at the end of an advantageous section. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display, the input request LED, and the replaying LED at the end of an advantageous section. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the setting process of the state control data of an advantageous section notification LED. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the main process performed by the main control unit in Example 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the ball ejection control process performed by a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the AT state management processing performed by the main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the net increase number counter value. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display mode of a game assist indicator at the start of an advantageous section.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

A first embodiment of a slot machine, which is a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is composed of a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b rotatably pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. There is. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other are arranged in the same number in a predetermined order are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged side by side in the see-through window 3 provided in the substantially center of the front of the slot machine 1. Each is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages and is arranged so that it can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of types of symbols (“red 7”, “white 7”, “net 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, “white BAR”, which are individually identifiable. "Cherry", "watermelon", "bell", "replay", "plum") are arranged in a predetermined order.

Although the configuration using three reels is illustrated in this embodiment, a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit for variably displaying the symbols by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is configured, but the variable display unit may be other than the reel, for example, a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. The design may be changed and displayed by moving the belt on which the reels are arranged. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display unit is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display unit may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, there are a medal insertion section 4 in which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 in which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value). ) Is used as the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum number of medals among the specified number of medals (3 in this embodiment) determined according to the gaming state within the range, as medals. Settlement switch 10, which is operated when the medals used for setting the stored medals and the number of bets are settled (the medals used for setting the credits and the number of bets are returned), and which is operated when starting the game. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are operated when the rotations of the start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, are provided so as to be operable by the player.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a credit display 11 displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents when an error occurs are shown. Game auxiliary display 12, game auxiliary display 12, which displays an error code, operation information (navigation information) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, an advantageous section display indicating that the control is controlled in an advantageous section, etc. 1BETLED14 that notifies by lighting that 1 is set, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the number of bets is 2 by lighting, 3BETLED16 that notifies by lighting that 3 bets are set, and the insertion of medals The input request LED 17 that notifies the possible state by lighting, the start effective LED 18 that notifies that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective, and the wait (because a certain period has not passed since the previous game start). The game display unit 13 provided with a waiting LED 19 for notifying by lighting that the reel is in the process of waiting for the start of rotation, and a replay LED 20 for notifying that the replay game is in progress by lighting. It is provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effective is provided, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, there are left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) that notify by lighting that the operation of stopping the reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. It is provided.

Further, on the front of the slot machine 1, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying an image or the like, and an advantageous section effect lamp 57 capable of suggesting which game section is controlled among a plurality of game sections described later depending on the lighting mode. However, it is provided.

The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and is on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The display area 51a is provided so as to be arranged in. Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the back side of the liquid crystal display 51 can be visually recognized from the player side through the transmission region 51b corresponding to the perspective window 3 and the perspective window 3 in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51. be.

Inside the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 that detects a reset operation for canceling the error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by a predetermined key operation, and at that time while changing the set value or checking the set value. Either the hopper tank side or the medal payout outlet 9 side, which will be described later, is provided inside the slot machine 1 so that the flow path of the medals inserted from the set value display 24 and the medal insertion unit 4 on which the set value is displayed is displayed. A medal selector (not shown) having a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to the medal, and a medal selector 31a, 31b, 31c for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side is provided. ing.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the above-mentioned reels 2L, 2C, 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. A reel unit (not shown), a hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout outlet 9, and a hopper. A hopper unit (not shown) including a payout sensor 34c that detects medals paid out by driving a motor 34b is provided.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, an overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank is provided. The overflow tank 35 is provided with a full tank sensor 35a for detecting that the stored medals are full.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, it functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state, and will be described later in the setting change state. A reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the effect control board 90 responds to the game state. The production is controlled.

The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the input medal sensors 31a, 31b, 31c, and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R. A payout sensor 34c, a full tank sensor 35a, a setting key switch 37, and a reset / setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals of these connected switches are input.

Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop effective LED 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, advantageous section LED 25, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, hopper motor 34b are connected, and these electric parts are connected. It is driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer provided with a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d, and is equipped with a main control unit 41 that controls the game.

The main CPU 41a includes a plurality of registers used for performing various operations. The main CPU 41a updates the value of a predetermined register by executing various instructions such as an arithmetic instruction and a read instruction included in the program, and stores the RAM 41c designated by the value (address) of the predetermined register. It is possible to update the value (data) stored in the area.

The main control unit 41 performs various controls for advancing the game in response to the detection of an operation accompanying the progress of the game, and also transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and the command is not sent from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41.

The staging control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 of the previous technique, an advantageous section staging lamp 57, a speaker capable of outputting sound, and a reel LED (not shown) capable of illuminating predetermined positions of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. Etc. are connected, and the output state of these staging devices can be controlled by the sub control unit 91 mounted on the staging control board 90. The sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 and performs various controls for performing the effect.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the lottery that affects the advantage to the player such as the internal lottery. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is fixed as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by a predetermined key operation, is opened. Of the clerk of the game store to be installed, only the clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate it. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, only the clerk who has the key for operating the setting key switch 37 can operate the setting key switch 37 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires a key operation using a predetermined key, so that only a store clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate the reset switch 23. Further, the reset / setting switch 38 also functions as a reset switch for canceling the error state in the normal state.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or a MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set a bet number using credits. When a predetermined number of bets is set according to the game state, the predetermined winning lines LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, are arranged horizontally in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R). It is set across the symbols), and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount will be added to the credit. Further, in this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are rotated, stop control is performed for the corresponding reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and the rotation of the reel is performed. It is stopped, and the design of the reel is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result.

In the stop control, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation is stopped within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms (millisecond) in this embodiment) from the time when the operation of each stop switch is performed. Is done. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and 80 (rotation) x 21 (number of symbol frames per reel, for example, 21 frames) = 1680 frames of symbols are varied, so a predetermined maximum Until the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, up to four frames of symbols can be drawn in. That is, in the stop control, one symbol from the symbol displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the symbols up to 4 frames ahead, for a total of 5 frames (retraction range). Can be selected and led to the reels 2L, 2R, 2R.

As a result, in the stop control, when the rotation is stopped by operating the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the winning combination won in the internal lottery described later is selected. If the constituent symbols are within the pull-in range from the symbol when the stop switch is operated to 4 frames ahead, the symbol is pulled onto the winning line LN to rotate the reel on which the stop switch is operated. On the other hand, if the symbols that make up the winning combination that has been won in the internal lottery are not within the drawing range, the symbols that make up the winning combination that has not been won in the internal lottery will be the winning line LN. It is possible to pull a symbol that does not constitute any winning combination onto the winning line LN so as not to stop upward, and control the stop switch to stop the rotation of the operated reel.

Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, one game is ended, and the combination of the winning combination symbols predetermined on the winning line LN is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C and 2R. In that case, a prize is generated, and a number of medals determined according to the prize are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the medals are directly paid out from the medal payout exit 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state stops on the winning line LN as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols. ..

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control for executing the game (game control) starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the game state, and it is not necessary to set a small combination with medal payout and a bet number. There is a re-gaming role that enables the start of the next game, and a special role that involves a transition to a gaming state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small role and the replaying role are collectively referred to as the general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to be won, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for the winning combination. In the internal lottery, whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each of the above-mentioned combinations is before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the specified number). When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the bet number set), it is determined by using a random number.

Of the winning flags for each combination, the winning flags for the small combination and the replaying combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special combination is The flag is valid until all the allowed combinations of combinations are available, and is invalid in the game where all the allowed combinations of combinations are available. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of the winning combinations allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It has become.

Further, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, stop operation order, operation timing), it is more advantageous than the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. A role and a replaying role (hereinafter, may be referred to as a navigation target role) can be won. The navigation target role may be, for example, a role that is more advantageous than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode and the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Includes a combination in which, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined predetermined operation mode, the rate of stopping the advantageous stop mode is higher than that in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Further, the advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode accompanied by the awarding of medals, but also a stop mode accompanied by a transition to an advantageous gaming state, a stop mode in which a transition to an unfavorable gaming state is avoided, and the like.

The main control unit 41 executes a navigation notification that notifies the navigation information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result, by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT), which is a possible notification period. The main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT and controls the AT by granting the right to be controlled by the AT to the player. Then, when the AT is controlled, by winning the navigation target combination, the navigation notification is executed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, the push order, which is advantageous for the player). The operation timing, etc.) is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command that can specify an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The navigation effect to be notified is executed by using 51 or the like. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the navigation target winning combination won in the internal lottery can be reliably won.

[About the lottery target role of the internal lottery]
In the internal lottery of this embodiment, the lottery target combination includes a plurality of lottery target combinations, and each lottery target combination includes one or a plurality of winning combinations.

As shown in FIG. 4, a different number (hereinafter referred to as a combination number) is assigned to each lottery target combination in advance, and one lottery target combination can be specified by one combination number. In addition, the lottery target combination is the lottery target combination A in the BB that is the target of the lottery only during the BB, the lottery target combination B related to the advantageous section to be transferred to the advantageous section due to the winning, and the waiting section to be transferred to the waiting section due to the winning. The winning combination is classified into the lottery target combination C and the lottery target combination D not related to the advantageous section or the waiting section that is not transferred to the advantageous section or the waiting section due to the winning, and the combination number is assigned.

The combination numbers of each lottery target combination included in the lottery target combination A (49, 50 in this embodiment) are the combination numbers of each lottery target combination included in the lottery target combination B (38 to 48 in this embodiment). A larger numerical value is assigned, and the combination number of each lottery target combination included in the lottery target combination B (38 to 48 in this embodiment) is the combination number (book) of each lottery target combination included in the lottery target combination C. In the embodiment, a numerical value larger than 35 to 38) is assigned, and the combination number of each lottery target combination included in the lottery target combination C (35 to 38 in this embodiment) is included in each lottery target combination D. A numerical value larger than the winning combination number of the lottery target combination (1 to 34 in this embodiment) is assigned.

In addition, if any of the lottery target winning combinations is won by the above-mentioned internal lottery, the winning combination number of the winning lottery target winning combination is set as the winning number, and if none of the lottery target winning combination is won. , 0 are set as winning numbers. Since the winning number set when any of the lottery target combinations is won matches the winning combination of the lottery target combinations, the winning numbers are in a specific range (for example, 38 to 48, 35 to 37, etc.). It is possible to specify the type of winning lottery target combination based on the existence.

[Navigation notification and navigation production]
The navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation effect performed by the sub control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the game auxiliary display 12 included in the main control unit 41 is composed of two indicators 12L and 12R capable of turning on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and each segment is divided into two. It is a display that can be turned on. By controlling the predetermined segments of the indicators 12L and 12R to the lighting mode, predetermined numbers (“0” to “9”), symbols (for example, “-”, “.”, Etc.), and alphabetic characters (for example, “E”) are controlled. ”, Etc.) can be displayed in 1 or 2 digits to display the number of medals to be paid out, an error code, a display showing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player, and the like. ..

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification and operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which are advantageous for the player. The game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with a navigation number that can specify the mode (in this embodiment, the operation order), and the operation mode is notified.

As shown in FIG. 5B, in the navigation notification, for example, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player, is the operation order in which the left reel 2L is stopped first (hereinafter, the left first). 1) In the case of a stop operation), the navigation number "1-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the advantageous operation mode is the left first stop operation. Further, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player is the operation order for stopping the middle reel 2C first (hereinafter, may be referred to as a middle first stop operation). , The navigation number "2-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the advantageous operation mode is the middle first stop operation. Further, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player is the operation order for stopping the right reel 2R first (hereinafter, may be referred to as the right first stop operation). , The navigation number "3-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the advantageous operation mode is the right first stop operation.

The main control unit 41 generates a small winning combination as a result of the game, and when paying out a predetermined number of medals, the number of medals to be paid out (hereinafter, may be referred to as the number of medals to be paid out) is a game auxiliary display. Display on 12. When the number of medals to be paid out is 9 or less, each segment of the left display 12L is turned off and only a predetermined segment of the right display 12R is controlled to be lit to display a one-digit numerical value. For example, when displaying 9 sheets as a single-digit payout number, the 1st to 8th segments of the left display 12L and the 5th segment of the right display 12R are controlled to be turned off, and the right display 12R is displayed. By controlling the 1st to 4th segments, the 6th segment, and the 7th segment to be lit, "9" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to indicate the number of medals to be paid out.

When the number of medals to be paid out is 10 or more, the predetermined segment of the left display 12L is controlled to be lit to display the tens digit, and the predetermined segment of the right display 12R is lit. By controlling and displaying the one-digit number, a two-digit number is displayed.

Further, when an error occurs and error processing is performed, the main control unit 41 causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display an error code that can identify the type of the error that has occurred. The error code is a combination of an alphabetic character "E" and a numerical value, and controls predetermined segments of the left side display 12L and the right side display 12R to a lighting state to display, for example, "E8".

When the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification, the display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game assist display 12 is different from the display mode of the number of medals paid out and the display mode of the error code, and the game assist display is displayed. The display of the navigation number in 12 is not mistaken for the number of medals paid out or an error code.

Further, as will be described later, the main control unit 41 controls the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 to be in a lit state when the game section is controlled to an advantageous section. , When displaying the navigation number, the number of medals to be paid out, and the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, each of the indicators 12L and 12R for displaying these. Along with the segment, the eighth segment of the right display 12R is controlled to be lit (see FIG. 5 (b) and the like).

Further, the main control unit 41 transmits a command capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player to be notified by the navigation notification, to the sub control unit 91 when performing the navigation notification. do.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs a navigation effect of displaying a navigation image suggesting an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R specified based on a command on the liquid crystal display 51. In the navigation image, numerical images "1" to "3" suggesting the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a symbol image suggesting that the stop operation is performed at the timing when the predetermined symbol is displayed on the reel are displayed. , Reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed corresponding to.

As shown in FIG. 5B, for example, when the left first stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, the numerical image of "123" or "132" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the navigation notification is used. When the middle first stop operation is notified, the numerical image of "213" or "312" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and when the right first stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, "231". By displaying the numerical image of "" or "321" on the liquid crystal display 51, the operation order notified by the navigation notification is notified using the liquid crystal display 51.

[About the game section]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can be controlled in a plurality of game sections, and the game section includes a normal section, an advantageous section, and a standby section.

The normal section is a game section in which navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player, is not performed. The normal section is terminated and transferred to the advantageous section when the lottery target combination related to the advantageous section is won in the internal lottery in the normal section. In addition, when the lottery target combination related to the waiting section is won in the internal lottery in the normal section, the process is terminated and the process shifts to the waiting section. If the lottery target combination related to the advantageous section is won in the normal section, the lottery target combination related to the advantageous section is transferred to the advantageous section in the winning game, and the next game of the game is controlled to the advantageous section. To. In addition, when the lottery target combination related to the waiting section is won, after the transfer to the waiting section as described later, the special combination carried over is transferred to the advantageous section in the winning game, and the next of the game. It is controlled to the advantageous section from the game of.

The advantageous section is a game section in which navigation notification can be performed when a predetermined navigation condition is satisfied. Further, in the advantageous section, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R capable of generating a prize in which the maximum number of payouts can be obtained in the slot machine 1 by winning a predetermined navigation target combination in the internal lottery. The navigation notification to be notified is executed at least once, which is an advantageous game section as compared with the normal section. Further, in the advantageous section, the navigation notification is executed by controlling the AT.

Further, in the advantageous section, the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R capable of generating a prize in which the maximum number of payouts can be obtained in the slot machine 1 is executed at least once, and will be described later. When the end condition of the control state (precursor state, CZ state, AT state) related to AT is satisfied, the process is terminated and the normal section is entered.

Further, in the advantageous section, an upper limit is set for the number of games played in one advantageous section, and the number of games played in a series of advantageous sections (hereinafter, may be referred to as the number of advantageous section games) is predetermined. When the maximum number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) is reached, the game is terminated and the normal section is started. It should be noted that the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be shifted when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games (1499 in this embodiment).

The waiting section is a game section that is transferred to an advantageous section on condition that the special role carried over is won. Each role of the lottery target role related to the waiting section to be drawn in the internal lottery includes a special role, and the special role is won by winning the lottery target role related to the waiting section in the internal lottery. It becomes. The waiting section is terminated and shifted to an advantageous section when the winning special combination is won together with the lottery target combination related to the waiting section. In the standby section, as in the normal section, the navigation notification is not performed when the navigation target combination is won.

Next, the control state related to AT will be described. The main control unit 41 can control the AT in the advantageous section into a precursor state, a CZ state, and an AT state as control states.

When shifting to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT state, and if the AT lottery is won, the predetermined number of games (this implementation) in the precursory state described later. In the example, 10 games) are played to shift to the CZ state described later, and a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment) are played in the CZ state to shift to the AT state described later. On the other hand, if the AT lottery is not won when shifting to the advantageous section, the game is shifted to the precursory state and controlled to the precursory state for at least a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment). Then, when the transition condition to the CZ state is satisfied in the precursor state, the transition to the CZ state is established, and further, when the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied in the CZ state, the transition to the AT state is performed.

The precursor state is a state suggesting the possibility of shifting to the CZ state, and is controlled for at least a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment). Further, when shifting to the advantageous section, the precursor state is controlled regardless of the result of the AT lottery performed at the time of shifting to the advantageous section. Whether or not to control the CZ state each time a predetermined lottery condition (for example, a predetermined lottery target combination is won in an internal lottery) is satisfied in the period until the predetermined number of games is played in the CZ state. A CZ lottery will be held to determine. Then, by determining that the control to the CZ state is performed during the precursor state, the transition to the CZ state is performed and the precursor state is terminated.

It should be noted that when a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment) are played in the precursory state, it is not determined to control to the CZ state or the AT state, and the navigation notification is executed at least once. If not, the precursor state is continued until the navigation notification is executed once, and the navigation notification is executed once, so that the warning state is terminated without shifting to the CZ state. On the other hand, when it is determined to control to the CZ state or the AT state when a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment) are played in the precursor state, the navigation notification is executed at least once. Regardless of whether or not it is, it shifts to the CZ state.

Further, in the CZ lottery, it is possible to win the transfer to the CZ with a probability according to the type of the advantageous section transition combination that triggered the transition to the advantageous section. The advantageous section transfer role includes the advantageous section transfer role of the first group, which has a relatively high probability of winning the transfer to CZ, and the advantageous section transfer role of the second group, which does not win the transfer to CZ. included. If the advantageous section transition combination that triggered the transition to the advantageous section is the advantageous section transition combination of the second group, the advantageous section is terminated without shifting to the CZ state and the AT state. Become.

The main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section when the first group's advantageous section transition combination is elected, or when the second group's advantageous section transition combination is elected to the advantageous section. Similarly, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit. Further, even when the sub-control unit 91 shifts to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the advantageous section transition combination of the first group, the sub-control unit 91 shifts to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the advantageous section transition combination of the second group. Also, the advantageous section effect lamp 57 is controlled to be lit in the same display mode (white). Even when the second group shifts to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the advantageous section transitioning combination, the CZ lottery is performed in the same manner as when the first group shifts to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the advantageous section transitioning combination. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that it will be transferred to CZ.

The CZ state is a state suggesting the possibility of shifting to the AT state, and is controlled for at least a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment). In the period until the predetermined number of games is played, every time the predetermined lottery conditions (for example, the predetermined lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery) are satisfied, the AT lottery performed at the start of the advantageous section The AT lottery will be held under favorable conditions. Then, when it is determined to control to the AT state during the CZ state or at the start of the advantageous section, the state is shifted to the AT state and the process is terminated.

When the predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment) is played in the CZ state, it is not determined to control the AT state, and the navigation notification is not executed at least once. Is shifted to the precursor state, and is then terminated by executing the navigation notification once. On the other hand, when it is determined to control the AT state when a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment) are played in the CZ state, whether or not the navigation notification is executed at least once. Regardless of, it shifts to the AT state.

The AT state is a state in which the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, so that the navigation notification is performed in an advantageous manner for the player. When shifting to an advantageous section or winning in the AT lottery performed during the CZ state, the predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is set in the remaining AT game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Will be added. In the AT state, the value of the remaining AT game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is decremented by 1 each time one game is played, and the value of the remaining AT game number counter becomes 0, so that the AT state. Is terminated. Further, in the AT state, each time a predetermined lottery condition (for example, a predetermined lottery target combination is won in an internal lottery, the AT is controlled over a predetermined number of games, etc.) is satisfied, the AT is controlled. An additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add the number of games, and by winning the additional lottery, the predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is added to the remaining AT game number counter. It has become.

Even if the number of remaining AT games is 1 or more, when the number of games in the above-mentioned advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) and the advantageous section ends, the AT state is changed. It will be terminated.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control whether or not a predetermined re-gaming combination is a lottery target in an internal lottery, or a plurality of gaming states (RT) in which at least one of the winning probabilities is different. When the AT is controlled, the value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 every time the game is played while the game is controlled to a predetermined gaming state. On the other hand, even when the AT is controlled, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining AT game number counter is not performed in the state of being controlled to the game state other than the predetermined game state.

[Advantageous section notification and advantageous section notification production]
The advantageous section notification effect for notifying that the main control unit 41 is controlling to the advantageous section and the advantageous section notification effect for notifying that the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the advantageous section by the main control unit 41 will be described.

The game auxiliary display 12 included in the main control unit 41 is composed of two displays 12L and 12R capable of turning on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and is a display capable of turning on each segment. .. The main control unit 41 controls the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advantageous section notification LED 12a) to be lit when the game section is shifted to the advantageous section. Then, when shifting from the advantageous section to another game section, it is possible to perform advantageous section notification that controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the off state, and the game section is controlled to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification. Notify that there is.

When the lottery target combination related to the advantageous section is won in the internal lottery in the normal section, the main control unit 41 shifts the game section to the advantageous section in the game in which the lottery target combination related to the advantageous section is won. The fact is determined, the game is shifted to the advantageous section, and the next game of the game is controlled to the advantageous section. In the game shifted to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit. Hereinafter, performing the advantageous section notification in the game in which the transition to the advantageous section is determined may be referred to as advance notification.

Further, in the normal section, when the lottery target combination related to the waiting section is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 makes the game section an advantageous section in the game in which the lottery target combination related to the waiting section is won. It is decided to shift to the waiting section. After that, in the game in which the special role carried over is won, the game is shifted to the advantageous section, and the next game of the game is controlled to the advantageous section, and after it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. In the game, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit. Hereinafter, performing the advantageous section notification in the game in which the transition from the standby section to the advantageous section is performed after the transition to the advantageous section is determined may be referred to as post-notification.

In addition, when the lottery target combination related to the advantageous section is won in the normal section, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment ends the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation in the game, and all reels. When the rotation of 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, advance notification is performed. It should be noted that after the advance notification is given when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation in the game is completed and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the bet number setting (replay winning) of the next game is performed. It may be configured to be performed within the period until the bet number is automatically set by.).

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment operates the stop switch related to the third stop operation in the game in which the carry-over special combination wins when the lottery target combination related to the waiting section is won in the normal section. Is finished, and when the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, post-notification is performed. It should be noted that the number of bets in the next game after the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped in the game in which the special role wins the post-notification. It may be configured to be performed within the period until the setting is performed.

Among the advantageous section transition roles, the lottery target role related to the advantageous section includes a lottery target role that includes a special role as a winning role and a lottery target role that does not include a special role as a winning role. Of these, the lottery target combination related to the waiting section includes the lottery target combination including the special combination as the winning combination, and if the advantageous section transition combination including the special combination is won, advance notification may be performed. There are also cases where post-notification is performed.

After the main control unit 41 performs the advance notification, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously turned on by controlling the advantageous section regardless of whether the winning of the special role is carried over or not. To control. In the advantageous section in the inside, the navigation notification may be executed when the navigation target combination is won, but the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, additional lottery) is not performed. On the other hand, in the waiting section before the post-notification, the navigation notification is not executed when the navigation target combination is won, and the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, additional lottery) is not performed. Then, after the post-notification is performed, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to the lighting state by controlling the special combination and controlling the advantageous section with the winning of the special combination. In the special state during the advantageous section, the navigation notification is performed when the navigation target combination is won, and the lottery for AT is performed when the lottery conditions for AT are satisfied.

When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the main control unit 41 controls to shift the game section to the normal section in the game and turn off the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Then, during the normal section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be turned off.

The main control unit 41 sends a command capable of specifying that fact to the sub control unit 91 when the game section is transferred to the advantageous section, and specifies that when the game section is transferred to the normal section. A possible command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, when the control state related to the above-mentioned AT is transferred, the main control unit 41 transmits a command capable of specifying the control state related to the AT after the transfer to the sub control unit 91. Thereby, in the sub control unit 91, it is possible to specify that the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section, that the advantageous section is terminated, and that the control state regarding the AT after the transition is specified. Then, the sub-control unit 91 can perform an advantageous section notification effect for notifying the control state regarding the game section and AT specified based on these commands.

Next, an execution mode of the advantageous section notification performed by the main control unit 41 and an execution mode of the advantageous section notification effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9.

As shown in FIG. 6, when the game section is controlled to the normal state and the standby section, the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state, while controlling the game section to the advantageous section. Occasionally, even when the control state related to AT is controlled to any of the precursor state, the CZ state, and the AT state, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state of the same predetermined mode (red in this embodiment). It has become.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the game section is controlled to the normal state and the standby section, the sub control unit 91 controls the advantageous section effect lamp 57 to the extinguished state, while the game section becomes the advantageous section. When it is specified that the control is performed, the lighting state is set to a predetermined mode (white during the precursor state, blue during the CZ state, red during the AT state) according to the control state regarding the controlled AT. It is designed to be controlled.

As described above, in the advantageous section notification performed by the main control unit 41, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is set in a certain mode (regardless of which control state the control state regarding the AT is, when the control is performed in the advantageous section. In this embodiment, by controlling the lighting state in red), it is notified in a certain manner that the control is performed in an advantageous section.

As a result, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous section, and according to the result of the determination, only controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lit state or the extinguished state, and the advantageous section notification is performed. It is advantageous because control can be performed and only the state control data (lighting) and the state control data (off) of a certain mode need to be provided as the data for controlling the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. The program capacity for controlling the section notification can be reduced as compared with the case where the advantageous section notification is performed in a plurality of modes. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control unit 41 regarding the control of the advantageous section notification. Further, by notifying in a certain manner that the control is performed in the advantageous section, it is possible to clearly notify that the control is performed in the advantageous section.

Further, in the advantageous section notification effect performed by the sub control unit 91, when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the advantageous section, the advantageous section effect lamp 57 is controlled to be lit to be controlled to the advantageous section. By controlling the lighting state of the advantageous section effect lamp 57 to a predetermined mode according to the control state related to the AT while notifying that the effect is obtained, the control state related to the AT controlled in the advantageous section is advantageous. It is suggested by the mode of the lighting state of the section effect lamp 57.

As a result, the sub control unit 91 notifies that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the advantageous section by changing the advantageous section effect lamp 57 according to the control state related to the AT, and the main control unit 41. The control state related to the AT, which is not suggested by the advantageous section notification on the side, can be suggested by the lighting mode of the advantageous section effect lamp 57, and complements the advantageous section notification on the main control unit 41 side. Can be done. Further, by notifying the control state of the AT controlled in the advantageous section in a predetermined mode, the interest of the advantageous section notification effect can be enhanced.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs error processing when an error is detected, controls the error state to disable the progress of the game, and cancels the error state by a predetermined operation to perform error processing. finish. Further, when starting error processing, a command capable of specifying the error processing to be started and the type of error occurring is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when the error processing is completed, the command is transmitted. A command that can specify that the error processing is terminated is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the main control unit 41 controls the game section to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state, an error occurs and an error state occurs. In the case of controlling to, it is possible to identify the type of error occurring by using the other segment of the game auxiliary display 12 while continuously controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state even during the error state. Control to display the error code.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the sub-control unit 91 shifts to the advantageous section based on a predetermined command, the sub-control unit 91 controls the advantageous section effect lamp 57 to the lit state until the advantageous section ends. While continuously controlling the advantageous section effect lamp 57 to the lighting state, it is controlled to a predetermined mode (white, blue, red) according to the control state regarding the AT specified based on the predetermined command. In this state, when it is specified that the error processing is started based on a predetermined command, the advantageous section effect lamp 57 is controlled to be turned off, and the advantageous section effect lamp 57 is controlled during the period controlled by the error processing. Is continuously controlled to the off state. In addition, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an error code indicating an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred and information about the error (for example, a cancellation method, etc.) that is specified based on the command. To control.

As described above, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lit state, the game is changed to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Since the auxiliary display 12 is displayed with an error code that can identify the error state and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be maintained in the lit state, the error state is set based on the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to make the player recognize that the control is performed and that the control is performed in the advantageous section. In addition, the player can be made to recognize the state of the gaming machine before the transition to the error state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state and shifts to the error state, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. While controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to maintain the lighting state, the sub control unit 91 turns on the advantageous section effect lamp 57 when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section. When the control is performed and the error state is shifted to the main control unit 41 side, the advantageous section effect lamp 57 is controlled to the extinguished state, so that the progress of the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side. Therefore, based on the lighting status of the advantageous section effect lamp 57 on the sub control unit 91 side, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking that the control is performed in the advantageous section where the game can be played.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment shifts to the setting confirmation state by detecting the operation of turning on the setting key switch 37 by the predetermined key operation while the game is not being played, and the game is played. The progress is disabled, and the set value display 24 is controlled to display the set value currently set in the slot machine 1. Then, when the operation of turning off the setting key switch 37 by the predetermined key operation is detected, the setting confirmation state is terminated. Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, a command capable of specifying the transition to the setting confirmation state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when the setting confirmation status is completed, the setting confirmation status is displayed. A command that can specify the end is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the main control unit 41 controls the game section to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lit state, the setting key switch 37 is set to the OFF state. When the operation to be performed is detected and the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 24 (not shown) while continuously controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state even during the setting confirmation state. Control to display.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 is controlled in the advantageous section by the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 lights the advantageous section effect lamp 57 in a predetermined mode (white, blue, red) according to the control state regarding the AT. Continuously control the state. In this state, when it is specified that the state shifts to the setting confirmation state based on a predetermined command, the advantageous section effect lamp 57 is controlled to the extinguished state, and the advantageous section is controlled during the period controlled to the setting confirmation state. The effect lamp 57 is continuously controlled to be turned off.

As described above, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lit state, the progress of the game is disabled and the set value display 24 is currently set. When the setting confirmation state for displaying the set value is changed, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be maintained in the lit state, so that the advantageous section is controlled based on the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to make the player recognize that this is the case. In addition, the player can be made to recognize the state of the gaming machine before the transition to the setting confirmation state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lit state, the progress of the game is disabled and the setting currently set in the set value display 24 is set. When the setting confirmation state for displaying the value is entered, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be maintained in the lighting state, while the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the advantageous section on the main control unit 41 side. When it is, the advantageous section effect lamp 57 is controlled to be in the lit state, and when the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting confirmation state, the advantageous section effect lamp 57 is controlled to be in the off state, so that the main control unit 41 In the setting confirmation state on the side, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the control is performed in the advantageous section where the game can be played, based on the lighting status of the advantageous section effect lamp 57 on the sub control unit 91 side.

When the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the power interruption processing in the timer interrupt processing (main), and the register of the main control unit 41 or the RAM 41c before the power interruption The data set in the predetermined area is saved in the storage area of the RAM 41c backed up by the backup power supply, and the data is held by the backup power supply, so that the data is held in the slot machine 1. When the power supply of the power supply is restarted, it is possible to return to the control state before the power failure. In particular, in the control state before the power failure, whether or not the navigation notification was performed, the content of the navigation notification when the navigation notification was performed, whether or not the control was performed in an advantageous section, and whether or not the stop operation was effective. It is possible to identify whether or not.

Further, when the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the sub control unit 91 executes a power cut process in the same manner as the main control unit 41, so that the control state of each staging device before the power supply is stopped. Is controlled to be held in the storage means backed up by the backup power supply, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, each staging device can be returned to the control state before the power failure. .. In particular, in the control state before the power supply is stopped, whether or not the liquid crystal display 51 is performing the navigation effect, the content of the navigation effect when the navigation effect is being performed, and the advantageous section effect lamp 57 are turned on. It is possible to identify whether or not it was controlled.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the game section is controlled to the advantageous section by the main control unit 41, the advantageous section notification is performed, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit, and the navigation notification is performed. When the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the rotation of at least one reel is controlled and the stop effective LED of the corresponding reel is controlled to be lit, the sub The control unit 91 performs an advantageous section notification effect, controls the advantageous section effect lamp 57 to be lit, and displays an image on the liquid crystal display 51 capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switch notified by the navigation notification. The navigation effect is performed.

In this state, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and a power interruption occurs, as shown in FIG. 8B, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, the stop effective LED 22L, 22C In 22R, the advantageous section effect lamp 57 and the liquid crystal display 51 are all turned off, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are all stopped.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the main control unit 41 has the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, and the stop effective. The control states of the LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, and the corresponding reels are controlled so as to return to the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a predetermined order. Further, the sub control unit 91 controls the control state of the advantageous section effect lamp 57 and the liquid crystal display 51 so as to return to the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a predetermined order.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the main control unit 41 first restarts the rotation control before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and restarted. By restarting the rotation control of the reels that had been performed, returning the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the state before the power supply was stopped, and then performing timer interrupt processing (main), the game auxiliary display is displayed. The display of the operation mode of the stop switch by the navigation notification in the device 12 and the lighting control of the advantageous section notification LED 12a are simultaneously restarted to restart the navigation notification and the advantageous section notification.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9B, the main control unit 41 is a stop switch corresponding to the reel that is performing rotation control by causing all the reels whose rotation control is restarted to rotate at a constant speed. The lighting control of the stop effective LED is restarted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the reel rotation control, the navigation notification, the advantageous section notification, and the lighting control of the stop effective LED are restarted by the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 is advantageous. The lighting control of the section effect lamp 57 is restarted, and the advantageous section notification effect is restarted. At this time, the lighting state is controlled in a predetermined mode corresponding to the control state relating to the AT that was controlled when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9D, an image capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switch notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the navigation effect is restarted.

As a result, all the control states of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game assist indicator 12, the stop effective LED, and the reel are returned to the states before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped.

In this way, when the navigation notification and the navigation effect are being performed in the advantageous section, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, so that the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect is changed. When returning to the state before the power supply is stopped, the main control unit 41 controls to simultaneously restart the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the display of the navigation notification of the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 is restarted before the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a is restarted, and the advantageous section notification does not notify that the advantageous section is used. , It is possible to prevent the navigation notification from being restarted.

In this embodiment, when the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect is returned to the state before the power supply is stopped in the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on and the navigation notification of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. However, it is also possible to restart the display of the navigation notification of the game auxiliary display 12 after restarting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and even in such a configuration, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is advantageous. It is possible to prevent the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 from being restarted before the section notification is restarted.

[About the special role winning suggestion production]
The lottery target role of the internal lottery of this embodiment includes a lottery target role including a special role and a duplicate winning combination (small role or replaying combination) that is elected in duplicate with the special role, and only a special role. Includes lottery target combinations and lottery target combinations including only duplicate winning combinations.

When it is specified in the internal lottery that the lottery target combination including the special combination or the lottery target combination including the duplicate winning combination has been won, the sub control unit 91 is concerned based on the command received from the main control unit 41. From the next game in which the internal lottery is performed, a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the special role has been won over a predetermined period (3 games or 10 games in this embodiment) is performed, and the special role is won at the end of the predetermined period. It is possible to perform a special role winning possibility suggestion effect to notify whether or not the game has been done. The special role winning possibility suggestion effect includes a special role winning possibility suggestion effect A in which the suggestion effect is performed over the first predetermined period (10 games in this embodiment) and a second predetermined period shorter than the first predetermined period (this). In the embodiment, the special role winning possibility suggestion effect B that performs the suggestion effect over 4 games) is included. Then, when the game section is controlled to the normal section and the lottery target combination including the special combination or the duplicate winning combination is won, the sub control unit 91 performs a suggestion effect over the first period. Possibility suggestion When the effect A is performed and the game section is controlled to an advantageous section and the lottery target combination including the special combination or the duplicate winning combination is won, the possibility suggestion is made over the second period shorter than the first period. It is designed to perform the special role winning possibility suggestion effect B to perform the effect.

In this way, when the sub-control unit 91 is controlled in the advantageous section, the special combination is won in a shorter number of games than when it is controlled in the normal section, and then the special combination is won. It is a configuration to notify whether or not it is done.

As will be described later, the main control unit 41 is the number of games played in the advantageous section every time one game is played, regardless of whether or not the winning of the special role is carried over in the advantageous section. When the number of games reaches the upper limit, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Therefore, if the carry-over state is prolonged, it is disadvantageous for the player, but when it is controlled to the advantageous section. Is a shorter number of games than when controlled in the normal section, and after the special combination is won, by notifying whether or not the special combination is won, in the advantageous section, compared to the normal section. It is possible to make the player recognize that the special role has been won with a small number of games, and it is possible to win the special role that has been won at an earlier stage. Even if the number is counted, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

[About the production at the end of the advantageous section]
As described above, in the control of the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 ends the control of the advantageous section when the number of games in the series of advantageous sections reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). .. Alternatively, the navigation notification that can win the small winning combination that can obtain the most medals to be paid out in the slot machine 1 is executed at least once, and the end condition of the control state related to the AT is satisfied, so that the advantageous section can be controlled. To end. Further, a command capable of specifying the number of remaining games to be controlled in the advantageous section is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 every time the game is started.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 controls the advantageous section effect lamp 57 to be turned off to end the advantageous section notification effect when the advantageous section ends, and the result of the game in the advantageous section ( For example, the main control unit 41 is produced by displaying the result screen suggesting the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section, etc. on the liquid crystal display 51 at the end of the advantageous section. It is possible to suggest that the control of the advantageous section has been completed on the side.

The sub control unit 91 is one of the games in which the advantageous section can be terminated when it is specified that the number of remaining games controlled in the advantageous section is one game based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 side. (At the start of the previous game), it is determined whether or not the maximum number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games in this embodiment) will be reached in the next game of the game. Then, when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is not reached in the next game, that is, in the next game, the navigation notification is executed at least once and the end condition of the control state related to AT is satisfied, so that the advantageous state is terminated. In that case, after controlling to perform the effect at the end of the advantageous section at the end of the game, the next game is started, and it is specified that the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 0. It is controlled to end the advantageous section notification effect at the end. On the other hand, when the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section is reached in the next game, at the end of the next game, the effect at the end of the advantageous section is performed and the control is performed so as to end the advantageous section notification effect.

As described above, the sub control unit 91 is controlled in the advantageous section, and when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is one game, the navigation notification is executed at least once in the next game, and the AT. If the advantageous state can be terminated by satisfying the end condition of the control state with respect to, the game is notified at the end of the advantageous section to suggest that the advantageous section is terminated, and then in the next game. Since the advantageous section notification effect is terminated, the advantageous section notification effect is continued even after the notification at the end of the advantageous section is performed, and the control of the advantageous section is resumed after the next game to continuously control the advantageous section. You can maintain the expectation that it will be done. Can be given to the player.

The control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15.

[About main processing]
The main control unit 41 is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and executes various processes according to the program stored in the ROM 41b. After startup, first, the startup setting process is executed to initialize the internal register provided in the main control unit 41, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the predetermined output port, and the like, and then the main process is executed. The main process is a process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of the game, and one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game.

Hereinafter, the control contents of the main process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the main process, first, the game start waiting process (Sa1) that waits until the game is started is executed. In the game start waiting process, first, a process of initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 41c set as an initialization target at the end of the previous game is performed by a game end setting process described later. After that, the game waits in a state where the bet number can be set, a predetermined number of bets are set according to the game state, and a process of starting the game is performed when the start switch 7 is operated. Further, when the start switch 7 is operated, a random number value for internal lottery is latched and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Further, in the game start waiting process, when there is a vacancy in the number of bets and credits and medals can be inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, the insertion request LED 17 is controlled to be lit, the credit is 1 or more, and the MAXBET switch. When the bet number can be set by the operation of 6, the BET switch effective LED 21 is controlled to be lit, and when the medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the bet number is set by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6, the bet number is set. The 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 corresponding to the bet number are controlled to be lit, and when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, the display of the credit display 11 is controlled to be updated, and the specified number is set. When the bet number is set and the acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be lit.

Then, after the game start waiting process is executed in the step of Sa1, the internal lottery process for performing the internal lottery is executed when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game (Sa2). In the internal lottery process, is it allowed to win each lottery target combination that is the target of the internal lottery based on the random number value for the internal lottery latched when the start switch 7 is operated in the step of Sa1? That is, a process of determining whether or not to allow the derivation of a predetermined display result is performed. Then, a winning number that can identify which lottery target combination (including loss) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A combination number is assigned to each lottery target combination in advance as described later (see FIG. 4). If any of the lottery target roles is won in the internal lottery, the winning combination number is set as the winning number, and if any of the lottery target roles is desired to be won, that is, if there is a loss. Is set to 0 as the winning number.

Then, after the internal lottery process is executed in the step of Sa2, the ball ejection control process for performing the process related to the game section is executed (Sa3). In the payout control process, as will be described later, for example, a process of shifting the game section to an advantageous section or a waiting section based on the lottery result of the internal lottery, a process of counting the number of games played in a series of advantageous sections, A process of determining whether or not the end condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied in the advantageous section is performed.

Then, after the ball ejection control process is executed in the step of Sa3, the reel control process for controlling the rotation and stop of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is executed (Sa4). In the reel control process, when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate at a predetermined rotation speed, and then the stop switches 8L, 8C, Control is performed to stop the corresponding reel according to the operation of 8R. Further, the reel control process ends when the stop control for all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is completed and the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released (the pressing operation of the stop switch is completed). Will be done.

Further, in the reel control process, after starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, all the reels rotate at a constant speed, so that the left, middle right, and stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are controlled to be lit. do. After that, the stop switch is operated for the rotating reel to control the stop effective LED of the corresponding stop switch to the off state.

Further, in the reel control process, after stopping the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C and 2R. To determine whether or not a prize has occurred. Then, when a prize has been generated, a prize flag capable of identifying the winning combination in which the prize has occurred is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Then, after executing the reel control process in the step of Sa4, the AT state management process for performing the process related to the end of the advantageous section is executed (Sa5). As will be described later, the AT state management office performs a process of shifting from a waiting section to an advantageous section at the time of winning a special combination, and a control of notifying that the advantageous section is controlled in the advantageous section. The process of setting the advantageous section notification flag to be shown in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the process of determining whether or not the end condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied in the advantageous section, and the process of ending the advantageous section in the advantageous section. Performs a process of initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which related data is stored.

Then, after the AT state management process is executed in the step of Sa5, the medal payout process for performing the process related to the payout of medals according to the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a result of the game is executed (Sa6). .. In the medal payout process, as will be described later, when a small winning combination is won as a result of the game, a predetermined number of medals are added to the credits or paid out from the hopper unit.

Further, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is awarded, the number of medals to be paid out due to the winning of the small winning combination is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and credits are given along with the payout of the medals. When the addition is performed, the control for updating the display of the credit display 11 is performed.

Then, after the medal payout process is executed in the step of Sa6, the re-game operation time process for performing the process of granting the re-game when the re-game combination wins is executed (Sa7). In the process at the time of re-game operation, as will be described later, when a re-game combination is won as a result of the game, a re-game operation flag indicating that the re-game is granted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Processing, processing for setting a medal counter for re-gaming for setting the number of bets for re-gaming in the processing for waiting for the start of the game of the next game, processing for controlling the LED 20 to be lit during replay, and the like are performed.

After executing the re-game operation time processing in the step of Sa7, the state control data (lighting) for controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the eighth segment in the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) to the lighting state. Is read into a predetermined register (for example, an accumulator register, etc.) (Sa8). After that, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section notification flag is set by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c where the advantageous section notification flag can be set by the above-mentioned AT state management process (Sa9).

If it is determined in the step of Sa10 that the advantageous section notification flag is set, the process proceeds to the step of Sa12, and the right side of the game auxiliary display 12 among the output buffers provided for each output port in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The status control data (lights) of a predetermined register in the output buffer corresponding to the output port that outputs the control signal to the 8th segment of the display 12R (hereinafter, may be referred to as the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED). Is set (Sa12). After that, the game auxiliary display 12 is subjected to the interrupt one-time wait process (Sa13), which waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once, and the LED dynamic display process executed in the timer interrupt process (main). The eighth segment of the right display 12R is controlled to be lit. In the eighth segment, every time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed until the state control data (off) described later is set in the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED in the main process related to the game from the next time onward. It is controlled to the lighting state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sa10 that the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the state control data (off) for controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state is controlled in the state in the step of Sa8. The data (lighting) is read into the read predetermined register (Sa11), and the state control data in the predetermined register is changed from the state control data (lighting) to the state control data (off). After that, the process proceeds to the step of Sa12, and the state control data (off) of the predetermined register is set in the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED. Then, the interrupt one-time wait process is performed (Sa13), and the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process (main) controls the eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 to be turned off. The eighth segment is controlled to be turned off until the above-mentioned state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED in the main processing related to the game from the next time onward.

After performing the interrupt one-time wait process in the step of Sa13, the game end setting process for initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is executed at the end of the game (Sa14). In the game end-time setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data used only for the game (for example, data indicating a winning result of a general winning combination in an internal lottery) is stored is set as an initialization target. In addition, when a special combination wins a prize in the game and control of the special state is started, or when control of the special state is terminated, data related to the special state (for example, data indicating the type of the special state) or A predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data for counting the number of medals to be paid out in the special state) is stored is set as the initialization target. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c set as the initialization target will be initialized at the start of the next game by the above-mentioned game start waiting process.

After executing the game end setting process in the step of Sa14, the process returns to the step of Sa1 and the steps of Sa1 to Sa14 are repeated. When the main process goes through, the process related to the control of one unit of game is completed, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

In the main process, a predetermined command is generated according to the progress of the game, set in the command queue, and a process of transmitting the command to the sub control unit 91 is appropriately executed.

As described above, in the main process, when the advantageous section notification flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12). The state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the above, and the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state. On the other hand, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the advantageous section notification LED 12a By setting the state control data (off) in the output buffer and controlling the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state throughout the advantageous section to be in the advantageous section. It is designed to notify that it is controlled.

Further, in the main process, after executing a predetermined process including the game start waiting process and the reel control process, the state control data (lights or turns off) is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a according to the setting status of the advantageous section notification flag. Is set to control the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to a lighting state or a lighting state. The reel control process is terminated when the third stop operation is terminated (the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released), which is advantageous after the third stop operation is terminated. The lighting mode of the section notification LED 12a is controlled. Then, after controlling the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game end time setting process is executed, and the process returns to the first game start waiting process, so that the main process completes. That is, in the main process, the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is set as the advantageous section notification flag within the period from the end of the third stop operation in the game to the start of the game start waiting process of the next game. Control to switch is performed according to the setting status.

[About the game start waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the game start waiting process, first, the value of the replay medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the predetermined register, the replay medal counter is initialized, and the value is set to 0. (Sb1). In addition, when the re-game combination is won and the re-game is given to the re-game medal counter in the previous game by the re-game operation time processing in the main process related to the previous game, a new game is played. A numerical value (3 in this embodiment) corresponding to the specified number of bets required for this is set. On the other hand, when the replay is not given in the previous game, the value (0) at the time of initialization in the step of the Sb1 is maintained.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter is larger than 0 based on the value read into the predetermined register in the step of Sb1 (Sb2). Then, when it is determined in the step of Sb2 that the value of the medal counter for replay is larger than 0, that is, when the replay is given in the previous game, the medal insertion execution process is performed (Sb3).

In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the replay medal counter read into the predetermined register in the step of Sb1 is set as the bet number, and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the lighting state, and the specified number (this embodiment). Then, control is performed so as to notify that the bet number of 3) is set. When setting the bet number, the value of the predetermined register in which the value of the replay medal counter is read in the step of Sb1 is subtracted by 1, the bet number is added by 1, and the bet number after the addition is 1 After setting ~ 3BETLEDs 14 ~ 16 to the lighting state, the process of controlling the corresponding 1 ~ 3BETLEDs 14 ~ 16 to the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt process is repeated until the value of the replay medal counter becomes 0. When the value of the re-game medal counter becomes 0, the process of setting the bet number is completed, and each time the bet number is added by 1, 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are turned on. It is designed to be controlled sequentially. In addition, the value of the re-game medal counter is added to the number of bets at a time, all 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the lit state, and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are controlled to be lit by the LED dynamic display process. Therefore, it is also possible to control all of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 to be lit at the same time by one timer interrupt process.

After performing the medal insertion execution process in the step of Sb3, the medal care permission setting process is performed (Sb4). Further, when it is determined in the step of Sb2 that the value of the medal counter for replay is not larger than 0, that is, when the replay is not given in the previous game, the process of the step of Sb3 is not executed. Proceed to the step of Sb4 and perform the medal care permission setting process.

In the medal care permission setting process, the value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and when the value of the credit does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) and there is a vacancy in the credit. And, referring to the set value of the bet number, when the value of the bet number does not reach the specified number (3 in this embodiment) and the bet number is vacant, the medal insertion unit 4 A medal care permission flag indicating that the medal is allowed to be inserted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, in the medal care permission setting process, the medal care permission flag is set when there is a vacancy in the credit regardless of whether or not the replay is granted. If is granted, even if there is a vacancy in the credit, the medal care permission flag is not set, and if there is a vacancy in the number of bets, or if there is a vacancy in the credit and no replay is granted. , The medal care permission flag may be set.

After performing the medal care permission setting process in the step of Sb4, the interrupt wait process is performed once (Sb5). By performing the interrupt wait processing once, the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed and the detection status of various switches, the LED lighting status, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection status of these various switches is updated. In the updated state, subsequent processing (for example, medal detection processing and operation input reception processing described later) can be performed.

After the interrupt wait process is performed once in the step of Sb5 and the timer interrupt is performed once, the medal is referred to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the medal care permission flag can be set by the above-mentioned medal care permission setting process. It is determined whether or not the maintenance permission flag is set (Sb6).

When it is determined that the medal care permission flag is set in the step of Sb6, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state (energized state) (Sb7). By setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the ON state, the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the hopper tank side, and the medal is controlled to be taken into the slot machine 1. Further, the lighting mode of the insertion request LED 17 is set to the lighting state (Sb8), and control is performed so as to notify that the medal can be inserted. After setting the lighting mode of the ON request LED 17 to the lighting state, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed and the LED dynamic display process is performed, so that the ON request LED 17 is controlled to the lighting state.

Then, after the insertion request LED 17 is set to the lighting state in the step of Sb8, the medal detection process is performed (Sb9). If it is determined that the medal care permission flag is not set in the step of Sb6, the process proceeds to the step of Sb9 and the medal detection process is performed without executing each process of the step of Sb7 and the step of Sb8.

In the medal detection process, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the output signals (hereinafter, may be referred to as medal insertion signals) of the inserted medal sensors 31a, 31b, 31c and the transition of the medal insertion signal, and it is determined that there is no abnormality. If so, the medal insertion status is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. Then, when a normal medal insertion is detected, a process of setting the number of bets and accepting medals for credits is performed. On the other hand, when an abnormal medal insertion is detected, error processing is performed to control the error state that makes the progress of the game impossible. The error state is cleared by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38. When the error state is cleared, the abnormality that caused the error state to be controlled (for example, the clogging of medals within the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a, 31b, 31c, etc.) has not been resolved. In that case, it will be controlled to the error state again.

After performing the medal detection process in the step of Sb9, the operation input acceptance process for accepting the operation by the switch is performed by enabling the switch to accept the operation of various switches and operating the switch for which the operation is enabled. Do (Sb10).

In the operation input acceptance process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal and the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more, the operation is accepted by the MAXBET switch 6. Activate. Further, when the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a specified number when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled. Further, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is enabled.

Further, in the operation input acceptance process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in the predetermined register. After that, by setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state (non-energized state), the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the medal payout outlet 9 side, and the inserted medal is used by the player. Control to return to. Further, when the operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected while the operation by the setting key switch 37 is valid, the setting value display process for displaying the set value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected while the operation by the settlement switch 10 is valid, the settlement process of returning the medals stored in the credit to the player is performed. Further, when the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is enabled and the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the number of medals up to the specified number is set as the bet number within the possible range based on the credit, and the bet number is set. Performs the process of subtracting the set number of medals from the credit. After performing the processing according to the switches for which the operation is detected, the operation input acceptance processing is terminated.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in the step of Sb10, it is determined whether or not a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Sb11). If it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and the effective operation by the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to the step of Sb12, and the start effective LED display process for controlling the lighting mode of the start effective LED 18 is performed. Do (Sb12).

In the start valid LED display process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is effectively set by the operation input reception process of the step of Sb10 and the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start valid LED 18 is set. When the operation of switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected while the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled while the lighting state is set, and the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled. If not, the start valid LED 18 is set to the off state. As a result, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be in the lit state, whereby the start switch 7 is activated. Notifies that the operation by is effective. Further, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid, but the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or when the operation by the start switch 7 is not effectively set, the start is valid. By controlling the LED 18 to the off state, it is notified that the operation by the start switch 7 is invalid.

After performing the start valid LED display process in the step of Sb12, the process returns to the step of Sb5, and each process of the steps of Sb5 to Sb12 is repeated until it is determined that an effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sb11. conduct. The start-enabled LED 18 is controlled to the lighting mode set by the start-enabled LED display process by performing one interrupt wait process in the step of Sb5 after performing the start-enabled LED display process in the step of Sb12. It becomes.

In the step of Sb11, when the start flag is set in the predetermined register and it is determined that the effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected, the random number value for the internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42 and the predetermined value of the RAM 41c is determined. Set in the area (Sb13). After that, the start valid LED 18 and the insertion request LED 17 are set to the off state (Sb14, Sb15), the medal care permission flag is cleared from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb16), and the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared. (Sb17), the game start waiting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

After that, in the main process, the internal lottery process in which the internal lottery is performed using the random number value for the internal lottery acquired in the step of Sb13, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R depending on the detection of the operation of the start switch 7. One game is started by performing a reel control process or the like of starting rotation and stopping the corresponding reel in response to the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

In this way, in the game start waiting process, when the re-game is granted, the medal insertion execution process is executed, the number of bets for performing the re-game is set, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are lit. Sequentially control.

Further, in the game start waiting process, a medal care permission flag is set, and when there is a vacancy in at least one of the credits or the number of bets and medals can be inserted, the flow of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 The flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to be in the ON state so as to switch the path to the hopper tank side, and the lighting mode of the closing request LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

Further, in the game start waiting process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated by performing the start valid LED display process, While controlling the start effective LED 18 to the lit state, the operation by the start switch 7 is effective, but when the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or the operation by the start switch 7 is effective. When it is not set to, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be turned off.

Further, in the game start waiting process, when the valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected by the operation input reception process, the input request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are set to the off state, and the number of payouts of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By setting to clear, then the timer interrupt process is performed, so that the input request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are controlled to be turned off, and the payout number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased. Become.

Further, in the game start waiting process, it is possible to perform a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the insertion request LED 17 after performing the medal insertion execution process (Sb3). The bet number is set according to the granting of the re-game, and after the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled to the lit state, the input request LED 17 is controlled to the lit state.

Further, in the game start waiting process, in a series of processes (Sb6 to Sb12) after the interrupt one-time wait process (Sb5) is performed, a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the input request LED 17 is performed, and further start is valid. Since it is possible to perform the LED display process (Sb12), the timer interrupt process (main) after the process of setting the lighting state of the ON request LED 17 (Sb8) and the start valid LED display process (Sb12) is performed. As a result, the turn-on request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18 can be controlled to be lit at the same time.

[About ball ejection control processing]
The control content of the ball ejection control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the ball ejection control process, first, the section information that can specify the currently controlled game section is acquired by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc1). By default, the section information is a value indicating that the currently controlled game section is a normal section, and an advantageous section can be obtained by the corresponding processing of the ball ejection control processing or the AT state management processing described later. It can be updated to the value shown or the value indicating the waiting interval.

Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section based on the section information acquired in the step of Sc1 (Sc2). If it is determined in the step of Sc2 that the currently controlled gaming section is not an advantageous section, a gaming state determination process is performed (Sc3). In the game state determination process, it is determined whether the currently controlled game state is a special state (hereinafter, may be referred to as BB) that is transferred with the winning of the special combination, or a normal state that is not in BB. Judgment is made, and a value that can specify the judgment result is set in the predetermined register.

After performing the game state determination process in the step of Sc3, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled game state is in BB based on the value of the predetermined register (Sc4), and it is determined that the game state is not in BB. It is determined whether or not the winning of the special winning combination is inside the carry-over based on whether or not the winning flag indicating the winning of the special winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc5). If the winning flag indicating the winning of the special combination is not set, it is determined that the combination is not inside, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and any of the lottery target combinations (including loss) is selected in the internal lottery. Acquires a winning number that can identify whether or not the player has won (Sc6), and determines whether or not the advantageous section transitioning combination, which is a lottery target combination to be transferred to the advantageous section with the winning, has won (Sc7). A combination number is assigned in advance to each lottery target combination that is the target of the internal lottery, and a combination number within a predetermined range (35 in this embodiment) is assigned to the advantageous section transition combination among the lottery target combinations. ~ 38) are pre-assigned (see FIG. 4). It is possible to determine whether or not the advantageous section transition combination has been won based on whether or not the combination number of the lottery target combination specified based on the winning number is within a predetermined range.

In the step of Sc7, it is determined whether or not the winning number acquired in the step of Sc6 is the first specific value (35 in this embodiment) or more, and when the winning number is the first specific value or more, It is determined that the advantageous section transition combination (the lottery target combination B related to the advantageous section and the lottery target combination C related to the waiting section) has been won. Then, when it is determined that the advantageous section transition combination has been won in the step of Sc7, the update data (standby section) for updating the game section indicated by the section information to the standby section is acquired in the predetermined register (Sc8).

After that, the winning number acquired in the step of Sc6 is the second specific value (37 in this embodiment) or less, and the winning advantageous section transitioning combination waits to shift to the waiting section before shifting to the advantageous section. It is a lottery target combination related to a section, and it is determined whether or not the game section of the transition destination is a waiting section (Sc9). Then, when the winning number is not equal to or less than the second specific value and the transfer destination game section is not a standby section, that is, when the transfer destination game section is an advantageous section, the update data acquired in the Sc8 step. The update data (advantageous section) for updating the game section indicated by the section information to the advantageous section is acquired in the predetermined register (Sc10) so as to overwrite the (standby section), and the update data acquired in the predetermined register is acquired. (Advantageous section) is used to update the section information to a value indicating the advantageous section (Sc11).

On the other hand, when the winning number acquired in the step of Sc6 is equal to or less than the second specific value and the game section of the transition destination is the waiting section, the process proceeds to the step of Sc11 without processing the step of Sc10, and Sc8 The section information is updated to a value indicating the waiting section using the update data (waiting section) acquired in the predetermined register in the step (Sc11).

After updating the section information in the step of Sc11, the advantageous section start setting process for setting the advantageous section started with the winning of the advantageous section transition combination is performed (Sc12). In the advantageous section start time setting process, the process of initializing the end conditions (arbitrary end condition 1, arbitrary end condition 2, etc.) of the advantageous section to be started according to the type of the winning advantageous section transition combination, and the advantageous section Processing to initially set the advantage in the middle (for example, processing to set a lottery table used for lottery to determine whether to control CZ, AT, etc.), processing to set a counter to count precursor periods, continuously In order to count the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (hereinafter, may be referred to as the number of advantageous section games), the advantageous section game number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized and set to 0. Processing, processing that sets the ball ejection state information that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can specify the currently controlled ball ejection state to a value indicating a precursory period, and the like are performed.

Then, after performing the advantageous section start setting process in the step of Sc12, the navigation notification that can win the small winning combination that can obtain the most medals to be paid out in the slot machine 1 has not been executed at least once. The navigation wait flag indicating the above is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc13).

Then, in the step of Sc13, after setting the navigation waiting flag, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Further, in the steps of Sc4 and Sc5, when it is determined that the currently controlled gaming state is in the BB or inside, the ball ejection control process is performed without performing each process of the steps Sc6 to Sc13. Exit and return to the main process. If it is determined in the Sc7 step that the advantageous section transition combination has not been won based on the winning number, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game section currently controlled in the Sc2 step is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the advantageous section game number counter (Sc14), and then the special combination is won in the same manner as in the Sc5 step. Based on whether or not the winning flag shown is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the winning of the special winning combination is inside the carry-over (Sc15). Then, when the winning flag indicating the winning of the special combination is not set, it is determined that the player is not inside, and the game state determination process similar to the step of Sc3 is performed (Sc16).

Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming state is in the BB (Sc17), and if it is determined that the currently controlled gaming state is not in the BB, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. After acquiring the currently controlled ball ejection state in a predetermined register (Sc18) based on the ball ejection state information, the ball ejection state related processing is performed (Sc19).

In the ball ejection state-related processing, the processing related to the ball ejection state set in the predetermined register at the start of the processing is performed. For example, when the currently controlled payout state is a precursory period, a CZ lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the CZ when a predetermined CZ lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. Further, in the precursory period, the number of games controlled in the precursory period is counted, and the number of games is reduced to the number of games that can be terminated in the precursory period (10 games in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the game has been reached, and if the number of games that can be completed in the precursory period has been reached, it is determined whether or not the CZ transition condition for shifting to CZ by winning the CZ lottery is satisfied in the precursory period. judge. Then, when the CZ transition condition is satisfied, the ball ejection state is controlled to shift to the CZ, while when the CZ transition condition is not satisfied, the ball ejection state is maintained in the precursory period. The precursor period end possible flag indicating that the arbitrary condition that the precursor period can be terminated is satisfied is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Further, in the payout state-related processing, for example, when the currently controlled payout state is CZ, whether or not to shift to AT when a predetermined AT lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. An AT lottery will be held to determine. Further, in the CZ, the number of games controlled by the CZ is counted, and whether or not the number of games reaches the number of CZ endable games (10 games in this embodiment) capable of ending the CZ. If the number of games that can be completed in CZ has been reached, it is determined whether or not the AT transition condition for shifting to AT by winning the AT lottery is satisfied during the period of the CZ. Then, when the AT transition condition is satisfied, the remaining AT game is controlled so as to shift the ball ejection state to the AT, and the remaining AT game set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and controlled by the AT can be specified. A predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is added to the number counter. On the other hand, when the AT transition condition is not satisfied, the ball ejection state is shifted to the precursory period, and the precursory period end possible flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Further, in the payout state-related processing, for example, when the currently controlled payout state is AT, the number of games controlled by AT when a predetermined additional lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. By performing an additional lottery to determine whether or not to add, and winning the additional lottery, a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) is added to the remaining AT game number counter. Further, during AT, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the predetermined gaming state, and if the gaming state is the predetermined gaming state, the value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 each time the game is played. On the other hand, even during AT, if the gaming state is not the predetermined gaming state, the remaining AT game number counter is controlled so as not to perform the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining AT game number counter, and the remaining AT game number counter is set. Update.

Then, after performing the ball ejection state-related processing in the step of Sc19, it is determined whether or not the arbitrary end condition 1 for ending the advantageous section is satisfied based on the above-mentioned AT game number counter (Sc20). In the step of Sc20, referring to the remaining AT game number counter updated by the above-mentioned ball ejection state related processing, if the value of the remaining AT game number counter is 0, that is, when the AT is terminated, the game is arbitrarily terminated. While it is determined that the condition 1 is satisfied, if the value of the remaining AT game number counter is larger than 0, it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 1 is not satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 1 is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed (Sc21). In the advantageous section end flag setting process, the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is ended is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, the arbitrary end condition 1 is satisfied by the end of the AT, that is, the advantageous section is also terminated by the end of the AT, but the predetermined condition is satisfied after the end of the AT (for example, the number of games). Reaches the specified number of games, the predetermined combination is won, the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified number of times, the predetermined combination or the predetermined number of rolls is stopped, and the number of times the predetermined combination or the predetermined number of rolls is stopped is The advantageous section may be terminated by reaching the specified number of times, winning the lottery for the end of the advantageous section, etc.). The configuration may be controlled by AT.

Then, after performing the advantageous section end flag setting process in the step of Sc21, the instruction setting process for setting the navigation notification is performed (Sc22). Further, when it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 1 is not satisfied in the step of Sc20, the process proceeds to the step of Sc22 and the instruction setting process is performed without performing the process of the step of Sc21.

In the instruction setting process, when the navigation waiting flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the small winning combination that can obtain the most medals payout in the slot machine 1 among the navigation target combinations is won in the internal lottery. , The operation mode (for example, push order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R capable of winning the small winning combination is notified by using the game assist display 12, and the operation mode can be specified. Command is controlled to be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Further, when the ball ejection state is AT, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification is executed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player ( For example, the push order, the operation timing, etc.) are notified by using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command that can specify an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is controlled to be transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

In addition, in the instruction setting process, regardless of whether the currently controlled payout state is the precursor period, CZ, or AT, the medal that is the most in the slot machine 1 among the navigation target roles in the internal lottery. Every time it is specified that a small winning combination for which a payout can be obtained has been won, the navigation wait flag can be set by initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, so that the navigation wait flag is set when the navigation wait flag is set. To clear. As a result, the small winning combination that can obtain the most medals payout in the slot machine 1 among the navigation target roles in the internal lottery during the advantageous section is won, and when the small winning combination is first notified of the navigation, the navigation is performed. The wait flag is cleared. That is, the navigation waiting flag is cleared by performing the navigation notification at least once during the advantageous section, which can win the small winning combination that can obtain the most medal payout in the slot machine 1 among the navigation target roles. To.

Then, after performing the instruction setting process in the step of Sc22, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

Further, when it is determined in the step of Sc17 that the currently controlled gaming state is in BB, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the navigation wait flag can be set regardless of whether or not the navigation wait flag is set. Is performed, and when the navigation wait flag is set, the navigation wait flag is cleared (Sc23). As a result, when the control is performed during the BB in the advantageous section, the process of initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the navigation wait flag can be set is performed every game. When controlled during BB in the advantageous section, navigation is possible regardless of whether or not the navigation notification that can win the small winning combination that can obtain the most medal payout in slot machine 1 is performed at least once. The wait flag will be cleared.

Then, after performing the process of clearing the navigation waiting flag in the step of Sc23, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the ball ejection control process, the game section is a normal section, and it is advantageous in the internal lottery in the special state that is transferred with the winning of the special role and the state that the winning of the special role is not carried over. When it is determined that the section transition target combination has been won, the navigation waiting flag indicating that the navigation notification that can win the small combination that can obtain the most medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has not been executed at least once is not executed. Is processed so as to be set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, so that the navigation wait flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the timing of the first hit of the advantageous section. Based on whether or not the navigation waiting flag is set, the navigation notification that can win the small winning combination that can obtain the most medals payout in the slot machine 1 at least once after shifting to the advantageous section It is possible to determine whether or not it has been done.

Further, in the ball ejection control process, when the game section is an advantageous section and the game section is controlled to a special state (during BB) that is transferred with the winning of the special winning combination, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the navigation wait flag is set is set. , If the navigation wait flag is set by initializing each time the game is played, the navigation wait flag is cleared.

In this embodiment, when the game section is an advantageous section in the ball ejection control process and the game section is controlled to a special state (during BB) that is transferred with the winning of the special winning combination, the navigation waiting flag is set. The configuration is such that the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized every game, but it is also possible to clear the navigation waiting flag at the timing related to the winning of the special role. For example, when the special role is won in the advantageous section, the special role is won. At the time, during any game in the special state controlled by the winning of the special role, the navigation waiting flag may be cleared at least at any one timing at the end of the control of the special state.

Further, in the ball ejection control process, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the advantageous section game number counter is added and updated for each game, and the number of games played during the advantageous section is counted. Control. Further, in the ball ejection state-related processing of the ball ejection control process, when the AT is controlled, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined player, and the AT is controlled. , And when it is determined that the game is in a predetermined game state, the remaining AT game number counter is subtracted by 1 to update the remaining AT game number counter, while the AT is controlled, but it is determined that the game state is not the predetermined game state. In this case, the remaining AT game number counter is not subtracted, the value of the remaining AT game number counter is maintained, and the remaining AT game number is controlled to be counted. In this way, when the game state is not controlled to be advantageous to the player during AT, the medal payout rate in the advantageous section is excessively lowered by controlling so as not to subtract the remaining AT game number counter. By controlling so that the advantageous section game number counter is always added for each game in the advantageous section, the advantageous section does not exceed the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). It is possible to prevent the long-term medal payout rate from becoming excessive.

[About AT state management processing]
The control content of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the AT state management process, first, the section information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the predetermined register (Sd1). Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is a standby section based on the section information (Sd2).

Then, when it is determined that the game section currently controlled in the step of Sd2 is the standby section, the winning flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the predetermined register (Sd3), and the winning flag is set to the winning flag. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a special winning combination has occurred (Sd4), and if it is determined that a special winning combination has occurred in the step of Sd4, the section information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is used. After updating to a value indicating an advantageous section (Sd5), the section information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired again in the predetermined register (Sd6). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special winning combination has not occurred in the step of Sd4, the process proceeds to the step of Sd6 without processing the step of Sd5, and the section information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is displayed. Acquire again in the predetermined register.

If it is determined in the step of Sd2 that the currently controlled gaming section is not a standby section, the process proceeds to the step of Sd6 without performing each process of Sd3 to Sd5, and the game section is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The existing section information is acquired again in the predetermined register.

After the section information is acquired again in the predetermined register in the step of Sd6, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section based on the section information (Sd7).

When it is determined in the step of Sd7 that the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section, the advantageous section notification flag indicating that the advantageous section notification to notify that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section is performed is set in the RAM 41c. If it is determined whether or not it is set in the predetermined area (Sd9) and it is determined that the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the advantageous section notification flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sd10) and Sd11. Proceed to the processing of the step. If it is determined that the advantageous section notification flag is set, the process proceeds to the process of the step of Sd11 without performing the process of the step of Sd10. As a result, when the game section is shifted from the normal section or the standby section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification flag is set.

In the step of Sd11, it is determined whether or not the arbitrary end condition 2 for ending the advantageous section is satisfied based on the above-mentioned navigation waiting flag and the precursor period endable flag (Sd11). In the step of Sd11, when the navigation wait flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the precursor period end possible flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 2 is satisfied. If the navigation wait flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, or if the precursor period end possible flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 2 is not satisfied. The arbitrary end condition 2 is an end condition of an advantageous section that can be satisfied at least when the navigation wait flag is not set, and at least the instruction setting process of the ball ejection control process that can clear the navigation wait flag is executed. It can be established after that. Further, the above-mentioned arbitrary end condition 1 is an end condition of an advantageous section that can be satisfied regardless of whether or not the navigation wait flag is set, and is satisfied regardless of whether or not the instruction setting process is executed. obtain.

Then, when it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 2 is satisfied in the step of Sd11, the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed, the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sd12), and then the step of Sd13 is performed. move on. On the other hand, if it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 2 is not satisfied in the step of Sd11, the process proceeds to the step of Sd13 without processing the step of Sd12.

In the step of Sd13, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sd13). If it is determined in the step of Sd13 that the advantageous section end flag is not set, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section game number counter updated by the above-mentioned payout control process is referred to. (Sd14), it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) based on the advantageous section game number counter (Sd15).

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sd15 that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Further, when it is determined in the step of Sd7 that the currently controlled game section is not an advantageous section, that is, when the currently controlled game section is a normal section or a standby section, the AT state management process is terminated. And return to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games in the step of Sd15, or if it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set in the step of Sd13, the step of Sd16 is performed. Along with the end of the control of the advantageous section, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd16 to Sd25) for initializing the predetermined area in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored in the storage area of the RAM 41c is performed.

In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of times the process is executed is set in the predetermined register (D) as the initial value (1 in this embodiment) of the remaining number of times the initialization process is executed (Sd16). Then, the ROM 41b in which the RAM initialization data table capable of specifying the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas (capacity, the number of included addresses) to be initialized is stored. The address of the storage area is set in the predetermined register (HL) (Sd17). After that, the number of storage areas of the RAM 41c to be initialized is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL), and the number of initializations is the remaining number of times. While setting to the predetermined register (B), the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b and set to the predetermined register (C) as the initialization target RAM address (C). Sd18).

Then, after the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sd19), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C). By setting the initialization data set in the register (A), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sd20). After that, by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the initialization target RAM address is advanced by one (Sd21).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), after subtracting 1 from the remaining number of initializations (Sd22), it is determined whether or not the remaining number of initializations is larger than 0 (Sd23). If it is determined in the step of Sd23 that the number of remaining initializations is larger than 0, the process returns to the step of Sd20, and each process of Sd20 to Sd23 is repeated until the number of remaining initializations becomes 0. As a result, the storage area for the number of storage areas to be initialized is initialized with the initialization data from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table. ..

When it is determined in the step of Sd23 that the number of remaining initializations is not greater than 0, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table are initialized, the predetermined register (D) By subtracting 1 from the value, the number of remaining initialization processing executions is subtracted by 1 (Sd24), it is determined whether or not the number of remaining initialization processing executions after subtraction is 0 (Sd25), and the remaining initialization processing execution is executed. If the number of times is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sd18, and each process of the steps Sd18 to Sd25 is repeated until the number of times of execution of the remaining initialization process becomes 0, so that the advantageous section data initialization process is performed a predetermined number of times. Then, when the number of remaining initialization process executions becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

The predetermined area of the RAM 41c initialized by the advantageous section data initialization process includes a predetermined area in which data related to the advantageous section is set, and as the data related to the advantageous section, the advantageous section end flag and the advantageous section game number counter. While the data including the value, the navigation waiting flag, the data related to the control of the payout state (for example, the lottery result of the CZ lottery, the lottery result of the AT lottery, the remaining AT game number counter, etc.), and the data related to the control of other advantageous sections are included. The data regarding the advantageous section does not include the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. As a result, in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the state control data (lighting) set before the advantageous section data initialization processing is performed is maintained, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is maintained. Is to be continuously controlled in the lit state.

In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of times the initialization process is executed is set to 1, and the advantageous section data initialization process is performed once. However, the initial value of the number of times the initialization process is executed is set to a predetermined number of 2 or more. The advantageous section data initialization process may be performed a predetermined number of times of two or more times.

As described above, in the AT state management process, when the navigation wait flag is controlled to the advantageous section, the navigation wait flag refers to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is an arbitrary end condition of the advantageous section based on the setting status of the navigation wait flag. It is determined whether or not the end condition 2 is satisfied, and when the arbitrary end condition 2 is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is terminated is controlled to be set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. .. By determining whether or not the arbitrary end condition 2 is satisfied based on the setting status of the navigation waiting flag, it is possible to win a small winning combination that can obtain the most medals to be paid out in the slot machine 1 in a series of advantageous sections. When the possible navigation notification is not executed at least once, it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 2 is not satisfied, and the control so as not to set the advantageous section end flag is performed to continue the control of the advantageous section.

Further, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section is controlled to the advantageous section and the advantageous section end flag is set to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the advantageous section of the storage area of the RAM 41c is set with the end of the control of the advantageous section. It controls to end the control of the advantageous section by executing the advantageous section data initialization process that initializes the predetermined area in which the data related to the control inside is stored. The advantageous section end flag can also be set in the above-mentioned ball ejection control process, and even when the advantageous section end flag is set in the process, the advantageous section end flag is set in the AT state management process. As in the case of being set, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to control the control of the advantageous section to be terminated.

Further, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when it is determined in the AT state management process that the arbitrary end condition 2 is satisfied. Further, even when it is determined that the arbitrary end condition 1 is satisfied in the above-mentioned ball ejection control process different from the AT state management process, the advantageous section end flag is similarly set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Even when it is determined that the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in a plurality of different processes, the common advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Therefore, in the AT state management process, one predetermined area in the RAM 41c is set. By referring to it and determining whether or not the advantageous section end flag is set, it is possible to determine whether or not the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Further, by determining whether or not the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in a plurality of different processes and setting the advantageous section end flag, the predetermined end condition of all the advantageous sections is satisfied in the AT state management process. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the AT state management process is performed, and the processing load in the AT state management process can be reduced.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is terminated when the arbitrary end condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied in the above-mentioned ball ejection control process and AT state management process. Set to a predetermined area. Then, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section end flag is set in either the ball ejection control process or the AT state management process. Executes the advantageous section data initialization process to end the control of the advantageous section, and if the advantageous section end flag is not set, whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to end the control of the advantageous section. When the arbitrary end condition is satisfied in either the control process or the AT state management process, the determination of whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit game number is omitted by referring to the advantageous section end flag. Then, the control of the advantageous section can be terminated.

Further, in the AT state management process, whether or not the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined upper limit game number when controlled in the advantageous section is set as the value of the advantageous section game number counter. When the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed without setting the advantageous section end flag in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Control so as to end the control of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the arbitrary end condition 2 is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section end flag is set based on the setting. While controlling to end the control of the advantageous section by executing the advantageous section data initialization process, the end condition of the advantageous section is obtained when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. When is satisfied, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed without setting the advantageous section end flag, and the control is controlled so as to end the control of the advantageous section. However, when the arbitrary end condition 2 is satisfied. Further, even when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games, the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, the advantageous section data initialization process may be executed.

[About medal payout processing]
The control content of the medal payout process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the medal payout process, first, the winning flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the predetermined register (Se1), and the winning number / payout number command setting process is performed (Se2). In the winning number / payout number command setting process, the winning combination specified based on the winning flag set and acquired in the predetermined register is paid out according to the winning combination that can identify the winning combination and the winning combination. Set the command queue to send a command that can specify the number of medals to the sub-control unit 91. The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interrupt process (main).

After performing the winning number / payout number command setting process in the step of Se2, the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of the winning combination specified based on the winning flag acquired in the step of Se1 is acquired (Se3). ), The number of medals to be paid out is set as the remaining number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se4).

After that, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of sheets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 0 (Se5), and if it is determined that the remaining number of sheets is not 0, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is currently set. Refer to the credit counter that can specify the number of credits (Se6), and determine whether or not the credit has reached the upper limit (50 in this embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (Se7). ..

If it is determined in the step of Se7 that the credit has not reached the upper limit, the value of the credit counter is added by 1 (Se8), and the medal payout process is performed (Se9). In the medal payout processing, data for displaying the value corresponding to the value of the credit counter based on the value of the credit counter is set in the output buffer of the credit display 11, and is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The process of subtracting 1 from the remaining number of medals, the number of medals that have been set in the predetermined area of RAM 41c and have been paid out is added by 1 to the number of identifiable medals that have been paid out, and the value corresponding to the number of medals that have been paid out after the addition is displayed. The process of setting the data to be set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. The initial value of the number of paid medals is 0, and the number of paid medals is initialized at the end of one game.

After performing the medal payout processing in the step of Se9, the credit payout interval waiting process is performed (Se10). In the credit payout interval waiting process, a predetermined waiting time (in this embodiment, a time during which the player or the like can visually recognize the change in the display contents of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, for example, one medal It waits for about 0.16 seconds for each payout, etc.), and when the waiting time elapses, the credit payout interval waiting process is completed. By performing the credit payout interval waiting process, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed during the predetermined waiting time, and the display mode of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is the data set in each output buffer. It will be updated to the display mode corresponding to. Further, the value of the credit counter updated by the medal payout processing and the number of paid medals are displayed on the credit display 11 and the game assist display 12 for at least a predetermined waiting time, and the credit display 11 and the game assist are displayed. A player or the like can visually recognize a change in the display content of the display device 12.

After performing the credit payout interval waiting process in the step of Se10, the process returns to the step of Se5, and each process of the steps of Se5 to Se10 is repeated until the remaining number of sheets set in the RAM 41c becomes 0. Then, in the step of Se5, when it is determined that the remaining number of sheets is 0, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

Further, when it is determined in the step of Se7 that the credit has reached the upper limit number based on the credit counter, the hopper payout process is performed (Se11). In the hopper payout process, the hopper motor 34b is driven, and each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of one medal, the remaining number of medals set in the RAM 41c is subtracted by 1, and the number of paid medals is added by 1. After that, the process of setting the data for displaying the value corresponding to the number of paid medals after the addition in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is repeated until the remaining number of medals becomes 0. As a result, every time a medal is paid out from the hopper unit, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated. Then, when the remaining number of sheets becomes 0, the hopper motor 34b is stopped and the hopper payout process is completed.

After performing the hopper payout process in the step of Se11, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is won, if there is a vacancy in the credit, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of the small winning combination is added to the credit within the range up to the upper limit of the credit. When there is no vacancy in the credit, the number of medals that could not be added to the credit is paid out from the hopper unit through the medal payout outlet 9.

In addition, in the medal payout process, a small winning combination is generated, and when paying out medals to credits, every time one medal is added to the credits, the medal payout process is performed and the number of paid medals is displayed. After setting the data to be generated in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by performing the credit payout interval waiting process, and the data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. The control to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the data and keep the display on the game auxiliary display 12 updated and maintained until a predetermined waiting time elapses, is a medal to the credit. Repeat for the number of payouts. As a result, when a small winning combination is generated and medals are paid out to credits, the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially displayed over a predetermined time (number of medals paid out to credits x waiting time). Will be updated.

Further, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is generated and the medal is paid out from the hopper unit, the hopper payout process is performed and a predetermined time according to the number of medals to be paid out (for example, 100 ms per medal). The hopper motor 34b is driven over the entire range, and data for displaying the number of medals that have been paid out is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of one medal. Then, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed during the time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out, so that the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed based on the data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. It will be updated, and the display of the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 will be sequentially updated over a period of time according to the number of medals to be paid out.

[Processing when replaying is activated]
The control content of the process at the time of replay operation performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the process at the time of re-game operation, first, the winning flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sf1), and whether or not the re-game combination has won a prize based on the winning flag is determined. Judgment (Sf2).

When it is determined that the re-game combination has won a prize in the step of Sf2, a re-game operation flag that can specify that the re-game is to be activated in the next game is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf3), and the re-game is used. The medal counter setting process is performed (Sf4). In the replay medal counter setting process, the specified number of bets in the game is specified, and the specified number of bets in the game is set as the replay medal in the replay medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The minute value (3 in this embodiment) is set.

After performing the replay medal counter setting process in the step of Sf4, the lighting mode of the LED 20 during replay is set to the lighting state (Sf5), and the interrupt one-time wait process is performed (Sf6). By performing the interrupt one-time wait process in the step of Sf6, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the LED dynamic display process is performed, and the LED 20 is controlled to be in the lit state during replay.

After performing the interrupt one-time wait process in the step of Sf6, the process at the time of replay operation is terminated and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined in the step of Sf2 that the re-game combination has not won a prize based on the winning flag, the re-game operation process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, in the process at the time of replay operation, when the replay combination wins a prize in the game, the LED 20 during replay is controlled to be lit.

In addition, in the process at the time of re-game operation, when the re-game combination wins in the game, the re-game medal is set in the re-game medal counter, so that the re-game is performed at the start of the game start waiting process in the next game. The medal is set as the number of bets, the specified number of bets is set, and the game can be replayed.

[About timer interrupt processing (main)]
The control content of the timer interrupt process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The timer interrupt process (main) is a process performed by the main control unit 41 at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process is set to a time longer than the total time of the time in which the process repeated according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process, and this time and the next time. The process of repeating according to the control state always completes at least one cycle with the timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 16, the timer interrupt process (main) includes the LED dynamic display process, and each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, the LED dynamic display process is executed.

In the LED dynamic display processing, various LEDs and other indicators connected to the output port (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replaying). Control to set a lighting signal to dynamically turn on the lighting state of (LED20, etc.) according to the state of the output buffer set by each processing such as main processing, and send it to the lighting control circuit of the display of various LEDs, etc. And so on. By performing the LED dynamic display processing, the display devices such as various LEDs are controlled to the lighting mode according to the data set in the corresponding output buffer.

In the timer interrupt process (main) of this embodiment, although not shown in particular, a power failure determination process for detecting the occurrence of a power failure (power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped) and a power failure occurrence are performed. Occasionally, the data set in the register of the main control unit 41 or the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is backed up by the backup power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, it is stored as long as the power is supplied by the backup power supply. Data that can specify the detection status of various switches based on the power interruption process that saves the contents to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the process that initializes the predetermined output port when a power failure occurs, and the detection status of various switches. Processing, processing to update predetermined various timers set in the predetermined area of RAM 41c, processing to transmit a predetermined external output signal to the outside of the slot machine 1, processing to transmit various commands set in the command queue. Processing, processing of transmitting an excitation signal to each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R to drive and stop each reel according to the progress of the game, etc. are included, and various processing is executed in a predetermined order. It has become like.

[Transition of display mode of game auxiliary display, etc. at the start of advantageous section]
The transition of the display modes of the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the input request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 at the start of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

The main control unit 41 executes the above-mentioned main process, and sequentially performs a medal payout process, a process at the time of re-game operation, a process of setting the state control data of the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the output buffer, and a game start waiting process of the next game. By doing so, the display modes of the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the input request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled according to the result of the game.

When the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the reels have shifted to the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. 17A.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the game is started and the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won in the internal lottery, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section by the ball ejection control process. After that, the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is rotation-controlled, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12, the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, the wait LED 19, and the replay LED 20 are in the off state. Is controlled by.

Then, the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed (the pressing of the stop switch is released), and the rotation of all the reels is stopped, so that the reel control process is terminated and the AT state management process is performed. After the advantageous section notification flag is set based on the fact that the gaming state is an advantageous section, the medal payout process is performed.

Then, in the medal payout process, the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a predetermined number of medals (6 in this embodiment) are awarded due to the winning of the predetermined small winning combination. Is controlled to be paid out, and the number of medals paid out is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. At this time, the display mode of the game assist display 12 is controlled to display a value indicating the number of medals paid out, and is sequentially counted up and displayed by 1 each time one medal is paid out. It is updated and the final value indicating the predetermined number of medals according to the predetermined small winning combination is finally displayed. Until the final value of the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the waiting time for paying out medals to credits or the predetermined time for paying out a predetermined number of medals from the hopper unit is set. It will be necessary.

Then, when the payout of a predetermined number of medals according to the predetermined small winning combination is completed, the medal payout process is completed, and the process of setting the state control data in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed in the main process. .. In this process, the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the advantageous section notification flag set in the AT state management process described above, and then the timer interrupt process is performed. By performing (main), the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started.

After that, the process setting process at the end of the game is performed, so that the main process for the game in which the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small role is won is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed. ..

Then, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 takes in the medal inside. Is set to the ON state, and then the ON request LED 17 is set to the ON state. After that, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, so that the on-request LED 17 is turned on. Further, in the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance process.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small is transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the symbol combination of the winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. After the reel control process is completed, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of the predetermined small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the medal payout process, and then the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is displayed by the main process. The state control data (lighting) is set in, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the user has moved to the advantageous section. Further, after that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small combination is transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, so that the reel control is performed. After the processing is completed, the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main processing, and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting process that is performed thereafter. That is, after the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the operation has shifted to the advantageous section during the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective.

Next, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small combination is transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the missed symbol combination is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the combination has shifted to the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b).

As shown in FIG. 17B, when the game is started and the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won in the internal lottery, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section by the ball ejection control process. After that, the reel control process is performed, and when the reel control process is performed, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12, the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, the wait LED 19, and the replay LED 20 are turned off. Is controlled by.

Then, the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed (the pressing of the stop switch is released), and the rotation of all the reels is stopped, so that the reel control process is terminated and the AT state management process is performed. After the advantageous section notification flag is set based on the fact that the gaming state is an advantageous section, the medal payout process is performed.

In the medal payout process, since the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the winning with the medal payout does not occur. Is terminated without control to update. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the off state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, the state control data (lighting) is sent to the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is set by the AT state management process in the main process. After the setting, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

After that, the process setting process at the end of the game is performed, so that the main process for the game in which the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small role is won is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed. ..

Then, in the game start waiting process, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state so as to take in the medals on condition that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and then the insertion request LED 17 is set to ON. Then, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started. Further, in the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance process.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small is transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the combination of missed symbols stops on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. After the reel control process is completed, the state control data (lights up) is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process without controlling the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated by the medal payout process. ) Is set, and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the user has moved to the advantageous section. After that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small combination is transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the missed symbol combination stops at reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. After the control process is completed, the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting process that is performed thereafter. That is, after the combination of the missed symbols of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the operation has shifted to the advantageous section during the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small combination is transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the missed symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control processing is completed, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not updated by the medal payout processing, and the main By the processing, the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. On the other hand, as described above, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the normal section is transferred to the advantageous section. , When the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the predetermined small winning combination by the medal payout processing after the reel control processing is completed is It is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. That is, when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and when the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts lighting. The timing is different.

Even when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, or when the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the output of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed by the main process. By setting the state control data (lighting) in the buffer, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, and the processing timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started is common. be. However, when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the game auxiliary display 12 is not controlled to display the number of medals to be paid out after the reel control process is completed. While the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, the reel control process ends when the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination stops at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Further, after the control to display the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 is performed, the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process. Therefore, the time interval from the end of the reel control process to the start of lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is different, and the time timing from the start of lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is different.

Next, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. When the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B stops at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the symbol combination has shifted to the advantageous section is shown in FIG. 18 (a). ) Will be explained.

Here, the symbol combinations of the re-game combinations A and B, which are the winning combinations, are different. For example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the replaying combination A is a symbol combination of "BAR-BAR-BAR", and for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, the replaying combination B is " It is a symbol combination of "BAR-BAR-replay". The replaying combinations A and B differ in the constituent symbols of at least one reel.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the game is started and the advantageous section transition combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won in the internal lottery, the game section is advantageous from the normal section by the ball ejection control process. It is transferred to the section, and then the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is rotation-controlled, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12, the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, the wait LED 19, and the replay LED 20 are in the off state. Is controlled by.

Then, the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed (the pressing of the stop switch is released), and the rotation of all the reels is stopped, so that the reel control process is terminated and the AT state management process is performed. After the advantageous section notification flag is set based on the fact that the gaming state is an advantageous section, the medal payout process is performed.

In the medal payout process, when the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a control for paying out medals and a control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 Is terminated without being performed. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the off state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, the replay operation time process is performed, a predetermined value is set in the replay medal counter, the replaying LED 20 is set to ON, and the replaying LED 20 is lit. Is started.

After that, in the main process, the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is set by the AT state management process, and then the timer interrupt process ( By performing the main operation), the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started.

After that, the process setting process at the end of the game is performed, so that the main process for the game in which the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small role is won is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed. ..

Then, in the game start waiting process, the number of bets up to the specified number is set by 1 based on the fact that the re-game medal counter is set to 1 or more, and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially set to the ON state. Then, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started. After that, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 takes in the medal inside. Is set to the ON state, and then the ON request LED 17 is set to the ON state. After that, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, so that the on-request LED 17 is turned on.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. When the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and all the reels 2L, By stopping the rotation of 2C and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the process at the time of replay operation is performed and the lighting of the LED 20 during replay is started, and then the output of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed by the main process. The state control data (lighting) is set in the buffer, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the user has moved to the advantageous section. Further, after that, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started from the game start waiting process, and then the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed again. When the symbol combination of the game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B stops at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the lighting of the LED 20 during replay starts by the process at the time of replay operation. After that, the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. That is, even when the symbol combination of the re-game combination A stops at the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and when the symbol combination of the re-game combination B stops at the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts lighting. The timing to be done is common.

[Transition of display mode of game auxiliary display, etc. at the end of advantageous section]
The transition of the display modes of the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the input request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 at the end of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20.

When the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is changed from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG. 19A.

As shown in FIG. 19A, after the game is started and the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is rotation-controlled, the game auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right side display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, and the weighting The LED 19 and the LED 20 during replay are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is completed (the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the reel control process is completed, and then the AT state is reached. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the game section is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals (6 in this embodiment) are paid when the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination stops at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the winning of the predetermined small winning combination occurs. It is controlled so as to be issued, and the number of medals paid out is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially counted up and updated up to the final value indicating a predetermined number of sheets according to the predetermined small winning combination. Until the final value of the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the waiting time for paying out medals to credits or the predetermined time for paying out a predetermined number of medals from the hopper unit is set. It will be necessary.

Then, when the payout of a predetermined number of medals according to the predetermined small winning combination is completed, the medal payout process is completed, and the process of setting the state control data in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed in the main process. .. In this process, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is cleared in the above-mentioned AT state management process, and then the timer interrupt process is performed. By performing (main), the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

After that, the process setting process at the end of the game is performed, so that the main process for the game in which the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small role is won is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed. ..

Then, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 takes in the medal inside. Is set to the ON state, and then the ON request LED 17 is set to the ON state. After that, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, so that the on-request LED 17 is turned on. Further, in the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance process.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small combination is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the symbol combination of is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, so that the reels are reeled. After the control process is completed, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of the predetermined small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the medal payout process, and then the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is displayed by the main process. The state control data (off) is set, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. Further, after that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the symbol of the predetermined small combination is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is performed. After that, the state control data (turning off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting process that is performed thereafter. That is, after the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has been completed in the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective.

Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target winning combination including the predetermined small winning combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small winning combination is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the missed symbol combination stops at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (b).

As shown in FIG. 19B, after the game is started and the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is rotation-controlled, the game auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right side display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, and the weighting The LED 19 and the LED 20 during replay are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

Then, after the press operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed (the press of the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the reel control process is completed, and then the AT state is reached. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the game section is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, since the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the winning with the medal payout does not occur. Is terminated without control to update. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the off state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, the state control data (off) is transferred to the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is cleared by the AT state management process in the main process. After the setting, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, so that the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

After that, the process setting process at the end of the game is performed, so that the main process for the game in which the advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small role is won is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed. ..

Then, in the game start waiting process, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state so as to take in the medals on condition that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and then the insertion request LED 17 is set to ON. Then, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started. Further, in the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance process.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined small combination is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the missed symbol combination is stopped at reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. After the reel control process is completed, the state control data (turns off) is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process without controlling the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated by the medal payout process. Is set, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. After that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the advantage section shifts to the normal section, the predetermined small combination is missed. When the symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, so that the reel control is performed. After the processing is completed, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main processing, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting process that is performed thereafter. That is, after the combination of the missed symbols of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has been completed in the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective.

In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the advantage section shifts to the normal section, the predetermined small combination is missed. When the symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the main process is performed without controlling the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated by the medal payout process after the reel control process is completed. The state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target winning combination including the predetermined small winning combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the predetermined small winning combination by the medal payout processing after the reel control processing is completed is the game. It is displayed on the auxiliary display 12, and then the state control data (turns off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. That is, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and when the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The timing is different.

Even when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, or when the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the output of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed by the main process. By setting the state control data (turning off) in the buffer, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off, and the processing timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is the same. However, when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the game auxiliary display 12 is not controlled to display the number of medals to be paid out after the reel control process is completed. While the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, the reel control process ends when the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination stops at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Further, after the control for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is performed on the game auxiliary display 12, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process. Therefore, the time interval from the end of the reel control process until the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is different, and the time timing when the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is different.

Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the transfer from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed again. When the symbol combination of the game combinations A and B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a). ..

As shown in FIG. 20A, after the game is started and the lottery target combinations including the re-gaming combinations A and B are won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is rotation-controlled, the game auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right side display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, and the weighting The LED 19 and the LED 20 during replay are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is completed (the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the reel control process is completed, and then the AT state is reached. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the game section is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, when the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a control for paying out medals and a control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 Is terminated without being performed. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the off state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, the replay operation time process is performed, a predetermined value is set in the replay medal counter, the replaying LED 20 is set to ON, and the replaying LED 20 is lit. Is started.

After that, in the main process, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is cleared by the AT state management process, and then the timer interrupt process ( By performing the main operation), the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

After that, the process setting process at the end of the game is performed, so that the main process for the game in which the lottery target combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed. Will be done.

Then, in the game start waiting process, the number of bets up to the specified number is set by 1 based on the fact that the re-game medal counter is set to 1 or more, and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially set to the ON state. Then, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started. After that, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 takes in the medal inside. Is set to the ON state, and then the ON request LED 17 is set to the ON state. After that, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, so that the on-request LED 17 is turned on.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section occurs. When the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and all the reels 2L, 2C. By stopping the rotation of 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the process at the time of replay operation is performed and the lighting of the LED 20 during replay is started, and then the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started by the main process. The state control data (turns off) is set in, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. Further, after that, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started from the game start waiting process, and then the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started.

Further, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the re-game combination A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the re-game is performed when the advantage section shifts to the normal section. When the symbol combination of the combination A or the symbol combination of the replay combination B is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the replaying LED 20 is started to light by the process at the time of replay operation. After that, the state control data (turning off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. That is, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off even when the symbol combination of the replaying combination A is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and when the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The timing is common.

[Action 1]
As a conventional slot machine, there is one that is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and has a configuration that includes an advantageous state lamp that is lit for a period that is controlled to the advantageous state. In the slot machine having such a configuration, the timing at which the advantageous state lamp is turned on and the timing at which the advantageous state lamp is turned off are not considered.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 sets the game section as a normal section. It is possible to shift from When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 has a symbol of the predetermined small combination according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop either the combination and the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination on the reel, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination as a winning combination, which is advantageous from the normal section. In the case of shifting to the section, when the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is set to the predetermined small. After updating to the display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the winning combination, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light up, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the player has moved to the advantageous section, while the predetermined small number. When the combination of missed symbols is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light up, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a shifts to the advantageous section. It is controlled so as to notify the fact that it has been done, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is used when the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel and when the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel. The configuration is such that the timing at which the notification of the shift to the advantageous section is notified is different.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section, and at this time, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are used. Depending on the operation order, the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination may be stopped on the reel, or the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination may be stopped on the reel, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination may be stopped or the predetermined small combination. Since the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred differs depending on whether the combination of the missed symbols of the combination is stopped, the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a can be focused on.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is a case where the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is The timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the combination has shifted to the advantageous section differs depending on whether the combination is stopped on the reel or the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel. Is a case where the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the first small combination and the second small combination with different numbers of payouts due to winning, and the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, and the symbol of the first small combination When the combination is stopped on the reels, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed to indicate the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the first small winning combination. After updating to the embodiment, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, while the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel. May be configured to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, and to notify the advantageous section notification LED 12a that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. In such a configuration, it is the first time from when the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released until the final number of medals paid out by winning the first small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. , The second time from when the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released until the final number of medals to be paid out due to the winning of the second small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, is the first small winning combination. Since the time differs according to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of payouts of the second small winning combination, the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the first small winning combination and the second small winning combination, and the first When the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the reel and when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies the shift to the advantageous section is different. It is possible to pay attention to the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

In addition, the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the first small combination and the second small combination, and the symbol combination of the first small combination is stopped on the reel and the symbol combination of the second small combination is the reel. As a configuration in which the timing of notifying the shift to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification LED 12a is different between the case of being stopped at, for example, the main control unit 41 has the same number of payouts as the lottery result of the internal lottery. When it becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the first small combination and the second small combination and the normal section is transferred to the advantageous section, and the symbol combination of the first small combination is stopped on the reel, the third stop operation is performed. After the stop switch according to the above is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the first small winning combination, and after waiting for a predetermined waiting time. While the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has been entered, when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the third stop operation is performed. After the stop switch pertaining to The lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be started, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be controlled to notify that the advantageous section has been entered. In such a configuration, when the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel and when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, it is said that the advantageous section notification LED 12a shifts to the advantageous section. The timing of notification can be intentionally different by a predetermined waiting time. In such a configuration, the expected degree of the advantageous section to be transferred differs depending on whether the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel and the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel. By doing so, it can be suggested that the degree of expectation is different due to the difference in the timing of notifying that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, and the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a can be focused on.

Further, in the case where the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a winning combination and becomes an advantageous section transitioning combination including the first replaying combination and the second replaying combination, the main control unit 41 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. 1 When the symbol combination of the replaying combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the player waits for a predetermined waiting time, and the waiting time elapses to notify the advantageous section. When the lighting of the LED 12a is started and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has been entered, when the symbol combination of the second replaying combination is stopped on the reel, it is related to the third stop operation. Even in a configuration in which after the stop switch is released, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light without waiting for a predetermined standby time, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to notify the shift to the advantageous section. good. In such a configuration, the advantageous section notification LED 12a shifts to the advantageous section in the case where the symbol combination of the first replaying combination is stopped on the reel and the case where the symbol combination of the second replaying combination is stopped on the reel. The timing at which the notification is notified can be intentionally different by a predetermined waiting time. In such a configuration, the degree of expectation of the advantageous section to be transferred differs depending on whether the symbol combination of the first replaying combination is stopped on the reel and the symbol combination of the second replaying combination is stopped on the reel. With the configuration, it is possible to suggest that the degree of expectation is different due to the difference in the timing of notifying that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, and it is possible to pay attention to the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can settle the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10. In the main process, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 combines the symbols of the predetermined small combination. Alternatively, after the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is used to notify that the combination has moved to the advantageous section, and then the game start waiting process is executed and the game start waiting process is in progress. In the operation input acceptance processing of, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, and from the normal section to the advantageous section. In the case of transition, after the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination or the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification LED 12a until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective. It is a configuration to notify the fact.

According to this configuration, it is notified that the game has moved to the advantageous section until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective, so that the player ends the game without knowing that the game has moved to the advantageous section. Can be prevented.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the re-game combinations A and B as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 changes the game section from the normal section to the game. It is possible to shift to an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player, and the configuration is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) that notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the replaying combinations A and B as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 of the replaying combination A according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop any of the symbol combinations of the symbol combination and the symbol combination of the re-game combination B on the reel, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition role including the re-game combination A and B as a winning combination, which is normal. When the section shifts from the section to the advantageous section and the symbol combination of the replaying combination A or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released and the replay is performed. After controlling the middle LED 20 to the lighting state, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, while the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel. If this is the case, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light up, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to notify that the operation has shifted to the advantageous section. When the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel and when the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. The timing is the same.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the replaying combinations A and B as a winning combination, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section, and at this time, the stop switches 8L and 8C are used. Depending on the operation order of 8R, the symbol combination of the re-game combination A may be stopped on the reel, or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B may be stopped on the reel, and the symbol combination of the re-game combination A may be stopped. Since the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has been performed is the same between the case where the symbol combination is stopped and the case where the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped, the player is confused by the suggestion by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. It is possible to prevent it from being caused.

Further, the main control unit 41 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the first small combination and the second small combination having the same number of payouts due to winning. When the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stopping operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is finally changed by winning the first small winning combination. After updating to the display mode indicating the number of medals to be paid out, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light up, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the transition to the advantageous section is performed, while the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is a reel. When the game is stopped, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the second small winning combination after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released. After that, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be started, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be controlled to notify the shift to the advantageous section. In such a configuration, when the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel and when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, it is said that the advantageous section notification LED 12a shifts to the advantageous section. The timing of notification can be made common, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the suggestion by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can settle the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10. In the main process, the main control unit 41 becomes a re-game combination when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the re-game combinations A and B as a winning combination and shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. After the symbol combination of A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reels, the advantageous section notification LED 12a performs a process of notifying that the symbol combination has shifted to the advantageous section, and then the game start waiting process is executed to start the game. In the operation input acceptance processing during the waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination from the normal section. In the case of shifting to the advantageous section, after the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination A or the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination B is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section is notified by the advantageous section notification LED 12a until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective. It is a configuration to notify that the transition has been made to.

According to this configuration, it is notified that the game has moved to the advantageous section until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective, so that the player ends the game without knowing that the game has moved to the advantageous section. Can be prevented.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 is advantageous for the player from the normal section to the advantageous section. It is possible to shift to an advantageous section, and the configuration is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, and the main control unit. 41 stops the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination on the reel according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination as a winning combination. In the case where the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and the normal section is transferred to the advantageous section, the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel. In that case, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning a predetermined small winning combination, which is advantageous. The section notification LED 12a is started to light up, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to notify that the section has shifted to the advantageous section, and the lottery result of the internal lottery is advantageous including a predetermined small winning combination. It serves as a section transition role, and when shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section, a configuration for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the timing after the display of the number of medals to be paid out by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed. Is.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section, and at this time, the predetermined small with the number of medals to be paid out. The symbol combination of the winning combination may be stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and when the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped, after the display of the number of medals to be paid out by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed. Since the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies the user that the medal has been paid out at the timing of the above, it is possible to notify the user that the medal has been paid out.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the re-game combinations A and B as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 changes the game section from the normal section. It is possible to shift to an advantageous section that is advantageous to the person, and the configuration is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) that notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the replaying combinations A and B as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 determines the predetermined small combination according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop the symbol combination on the reel, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transitioning combination including the replaying combination A and B as a winning combination, and the replaying is performed when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. When the symbol combination of the combination A or the symbol combination of the replay combination B is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the LED 20 during replay is controlled to be lit, and then an advantageous section. The notification LED 12a is started to light up, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to notify that the section has shifted to the advantageous section. It becomes an advantageous section transition role including, and when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts lighting the LED 20 during replay and the notification to the effect that the replay is granted is completed. It is a configuration to notify that the transition has been made to.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section, and at this time, the re-game accompanied by the grant of the re-game is performed. When the symbol combination of the winning combination A or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reel, and the symbol combination of the replaying combination A or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped, the replaying LED 20 Since it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED12a has shifted to the advantageous section at the timing after the lighting is started and the notification that the re-game has been granted is completed, it is made to recognize that the re-game has been granted. Therefore, it can be suggested that the section has shifted to the advantageous section.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 is advantageous for the player from the normal section to the advantageous section. It is possible to shift to an advantageous section, and the configuration is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, and the main control unit. 41 is a symbol combination of the predetermined small combination or the small combination according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including the predetermined small combination as a winning combination. It is possible to stop the missed symbol combination on the symbol combination reel, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, and it is a predetermined case that the normal section is transferred to the advantageous section. When the symbol combination of the small winning combination or the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination was stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation was released, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R was stopped. After that, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, and then the lighting of the input request LED 17 is controlled to be started internally. When the lottery result of the lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and the transition is made from the normal section to the advantageous section, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are input after the rotation is stopped. It is configured to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the timing before the notification that the medal can be inserted is notified by the start of lighting of the request LED 17.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous section transition combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section, and at this time, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R After the rotation of the above is stopped and before the notification that the medal can be inserted by the insertion request LED 17, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the player has moved to the advantageous section. Before inserting a medal to start the next game, it is possible to notify that the player has moved to an advantageous section.

[Action effect 2]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 controls the game section to the advantageous section, the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section. It is equipped with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the advantageous section has ended, and when the game section is an advantageous section, the advantageous section is provided. The main control unit 41 operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination. It is possible to stop either the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination and the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination on the reel according to the order, and the lottery result of the internal lottery includes the predetermined small winning combination as a winning combination. When the winning combination is a lottery target and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the game assist display is displayed after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released. The display mode of the vessel 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning a predetermined small winning combination, and then the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the advantageous section has ended. On the other hand, when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is notified. It is controlled so as to notify that the advantageous section has ended, depending on whether the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel or the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel. The timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is different.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the advantageous section can be shifted to the normal section, and at this time, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Depending on the operation order, the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination may be stopped on the reel, or the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination may be stopped on the reel, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination may be stopped or the predetermined small combination. Since the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended differs depending on whether the combination of the missed symbols is stopped, the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a can be focused on.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is a case where the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and shifts from an advantageous section to a normal section, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is a reel. The timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended differs depending on whether the combination is stopped on the reel or the combination of the missed symbols of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped. , When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the first small combination and the second small combination with different numbers of payouts due to winning, and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, the symbol combination of the first small combination is When stopped on the reels, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed to the display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the first small winning combination. After updating, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended by the advantageous section notification LED 12a, while the third small combination symbol combination is stopped on the reel. After the stop switch related to the stop operation is released, the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be turned off, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be controlled to notify that the advantageous section has ended. In such a configuration, it is the first time from when the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released until the final number of medals paid out by winning the first small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. , The second time from when the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released until the final number of medals to be paid out due to the winning of the second small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, is the first small winning combination. Since the time differs according to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of payouts of the second small winning combination, the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the lottery target combination including the first small winning combination and the second small winning combination, and the first small winning combination. The timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended differs between the case where the symbol combination of the winning combination is stopped on the reel and the case where the symbol combination of the second small combination is stopped on the reel. It is possible to pay attention to the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

In addition, the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the lottery target combination including the first small winning combination and the second small winning combination, and the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel and the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is on the reel. As a configuration in which the timing of notifying the end of the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification LED 12a is different between the case of being stopped, for example, in the main control unit 41, the lottery result of the internal lottery is the same as the number of payouts accompanying the winning. In the case of a lottery target combination including the 1st small combination and the 2nd small combination, and the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the 1st small combination is stopped on the reel, it is related to the 3rd stop operation. After the stop switch is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the first small winning combination, and after waiting for a predetermined waiting time, the advantageous section. While the notification LED 12a is turned off and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is performed. After the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the second small winning combination, the advantageous section notification is performed without waiting for a predetermined waiting time. The LED 12a may be turned off, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be controlled to notify that the advantageous section has ended. In such a configuration, the advantageous section is terminated by the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the case where the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel and the case where the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel. The timing of notification can be intentionally different by a predetermined waiting time, and even in such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

Further, in the case where the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a winning combination and becomes a lottery target combination including the first replaying combination and the second replaying combination, the main control unit 41 shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the symbol combination of the replaying combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the player waits for a predetermined waiting time, and the waiting time elapses, so that the advantageous section notification LED 12a Is turned off and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. On the other hand, when the symbol combination of the second replaying combination is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is set. After being separated, the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be turned off without waiting for a predetermined standby time, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be controlled to notify that the advantageous section has ended. In such a configuration, the advantageous section is terminated by the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the case where the symbol combination of the first replaying combination is stopped on the reel and the case where the symbol combination of the second replaying combination is stopped on the reel. The timing at which the fact is notified can be intentionally different by a predetermined waiting time, and even in such a configuration, the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a can be focused on.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can settle the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10. In the main process, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and shifts from an advantageous section to a normal section, the main control unit 41 may combine symbols of the predetermined small combination or After the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, and then the game start waiting process is performed. In the operation input reception process during the game start waiting process, the reception of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled, and the lottery result of the internal lottery is a lottery target including a predetermined small winning combination as a winning combination. When shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section as a combination, the advantageous section is the period from when the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination or the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective. The notification LED 12a is configured to notify that the advantageous section has ended.

According to this configuration, it is notified that the advantageous section has ended in the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective, so that the player ends the game after recognizing that the advantageous section has ended. Can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 controls the game section to the advantageous section, the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section. The configuration is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the advantageous section has ended, and the main control unit 41 is an internal lottery. When the lottery result of is a lottery target combination including the replaying roles A and B as a winning combination, the symbol combination of the replaying combination A and the symbol of the replaying combination B are performed according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop any symbol combination of the combination on the reel, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the replaying roles A and B as a winning combination, and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the symbol combination of the replaying combination A or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, and after controlling the LED 20 to be lit during replay, When the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel, it relates to the third stop operation. After the stop switch is released, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to notify that the advantageous section has ended. The timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is common between the case where the operation is stopped and the case where the combination of the missed symbols of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the replaying combinations A and B as a winning combination, the advantageous section can be shifted to the normal section, and at this time, the stop switches 8L and 8C Depending on the operation order of 8R, the symbol combination of the re-game combination A may be stopped on the reel, or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B may be stopped on the reel, and the symbol combination of the re-game combination A may be stopped. Since the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is the same for the case where the symbol combination of the reeling combination B is stopped and the case where the symbol combination is stopped, the player is confused by the suggestion by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. It is possible to prevent it from being caused.

Further, the main control unit 41 is a case where the lottery result of the internal lottery is a lottery target combination including the first small winning combination and the second small winning combination with the same number of payouts due to winning, and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the symbol combination of 1 small winning combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the 3rd stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is the final medal by winning the 1st small winning combination. After updating to the display mode indicating the number of payouts, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, while the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel. In that case, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the display mode of the game assist display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the second small winning combination. The advantageous section notification LED 12a may be turned off, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be used to notify that the advantageous section has ended. In such a configuration, when the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel and when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the advantageous section is completed. The timing of notification can be made common, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the suggestion by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can settle the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10. In the main process, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, the main control unit 41 combines the symbols of the replay combination A. Alternatively, after the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reels, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended by the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and then the game start waiting process is performed. In the operation input reception process during the game start waiting process, the reception of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled, and the lottery result of the internal lottery is used as a winning combination for the re-game combinations A and B. The period from when the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination A or the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination B is stopped on the reels until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective when the winning combination is included in the lottery and the advantageous section is changed to the normal section. In, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended.

According to this configuration, it is notified that the advantageous section has ended in the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective, so that the player ends the game after recognizing that the advantageous section has ended. Can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 controls the game section to the advantageous section, the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section. The configuration is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the advantageous section has ended, and the main control unit 41 is an internal lottery. When the lottery result becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, it is possible to stop the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination on the reel according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. , When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and shifts from an advantageous section to a normal section, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel, the third After the stop switch related to the stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning a predetermined small winning combination, and then the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. , The advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to notify that the advantageous section has ended, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, and the advantageous section to the normal section. In the case of shifting to, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended at the timing after the display of the number of medals to be paid out by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the advantageous section can be shifted to the normal section, and at this time, the predetermined small amount accompanied by the number of medals to be paid out. The symbol combination of the winning combination may be stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and when the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped, after the display of the number of medals to be paid out by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed. Since the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the medal has been paid out at the timing of, it is possible to notify that the medal has been paid out and then the advantageous section has been transferred.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 controls the game section to the advantageous section, the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section. The configuration is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the advantageous section has ended, and the main control unit 41 is an internal lottery. When the lottery result of is a lottery target combination including the re-game combinations A and B as a winning combination, the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination can be stopped on the reel according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the replaying roles A and B as a winning combination, and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the replaying combination A or the replaying combination B When the symbol combination of is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the LED 20 is controlled to be lit during replay, and then the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off to turn off the advantageous section. The notification LED 12a is controlled so as to notify that the advantageous section has ended, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the re-game combinations A and B as a winning combination, and the advantageous section is changed to the normal section. In the case of transition, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended at the timing after the lighting of the LED 20 is started during the replay and the notification that the replay is granted is completed.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the advantageous section can be shifted to the normal section, and at this time, the re-game with the addition of the re-game can be performed. When the symbol combination of the winning combination A or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reel, and the symbol combination of the replaying combination A or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped, the replaying LED 20 Since the advantageous section notification LED 12a suggests that the advantageous section has ended at the timing after the lighting is started and the notification that the re-game has been granted is completed, it is recognized that the re-game has been granted. Therefore, it can be suggested that the advantageous section has ended.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 controls the game section to the advantageous section, the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section. The configuration is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the advantageous section has ended, and the main control unit 41 is an internal lottery. When the lottery result of is a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination or the missing symbol combination of the small combination is set according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop on the combination reel, and when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination as a winning combination and shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination or the predetermined small combination When the missing symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, and after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on. The lights are turned off, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, and then the onset request LED 17 is controlled to start lighting, and the lottery result of the internal lottery is determined as a winning combination. When the winning combination is a lottery target including a small winning combination and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started even after the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. The configuration is such that the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended at the timing before the notification that the medal can be inserted is notified.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the advantageous section can be shifted to the normal section, and at this time, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R The advantageous section is notified by the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the timing after the rotation of the above is stopped and before the notification that the medal can be inserted by the insertion request LED 17 is notified. It is possible to prevent the player from inserting a medal to start the next game without knowing that the game has ended.

[Action effect 3]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player in connection with the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player and the winning of the small winning combination. During the period in which the game auxiliary display 12 is provided and controlled to the advantageous section, the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be lit as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to shift to the advantageous section. It is a configuration for notifying that the game has been performed, and is a configuration for notifying that a part of the game auxiliary display 12 has been used as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the advantageous section has been transferred and that the advantageous section has ended.

According to this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the main control unit 41 with a display means separate from the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the navigation notification and the number of medals paid out as the display means for notifying the shift to the advantageous section. ..

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 uses a part of the game assist indicator 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the advantageous section has been transferred and that the advantageous section has ended. A display means provided separately from the display 12 may be used as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. For example, the game auxiliary display 12 may be located in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display 12. May be configured to arrange a separate display means such as an LED or a lamp and use the display means to notify that the advantageous section has been entered and that the advantageous section has ended.

According to this configuration, separately from the game auxiliary display 12, a display means for notifying that the advantageous section has been entered and that the advantageous section has ended is provided, so that a display for notifying that the advantageous section has been entered is displayed. It can be clearly distinguished from other displays and recognized, and even in this case, since it is provided in the vicinity of the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it.

In addition, various display means for notifying that the advantageous section has shifted and the advantageous section has ended are, for example, a credit display 11 provided in the game display unit 13, a game auxiliary display 12, an input request LED 17, and the like. By arranging the display on the substrate on which the display or the like is arranged, the display means can be provided in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display 12, and the player can prevent oversight. Further, by arranging display means for notifying the shift to the advantageous section, for example, around switches operated at the start or end of the game such as MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, and settlement switch 10. , It is possible to prevent oversight by the player.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a for notifying that the advantageous section has shifted and that the advantageous section has ended, and shifts to the advantageous section by controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in a lighting state. In addition to notifying that the advantageous section has ended by controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be turned off, in the main process, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is added to the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. It is possible to set the state control data (lighting) or the state control data (turning off) for turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the process of turning on the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the process of turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a are common. It is a configuration performed by processing, and in the common processing, after reading the state control data (lighting) into a predetermined register, whether or not the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section based on the section information data that can be specified. If it is determined that it is an advantageous section, the state control data read in the predetermined register is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, while if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, By reading the state control data (off) into the predetermined register, the state control data is changed, and then the state control data read in the predetermined register is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Then, the main control unit 41 executes the timer interrupt process (main), and after the main process, turns the advantageous section notification LED 12a into a lighting state or an extinguishing state based on the state control data set in the output buffer. It is a configuration that performs LED dynamic display processing to be controlled.

According to this configuration, it is not necessary to perform separate processing when controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state and when controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state, so that the program capacity can be reduced. Further, after uniformly reading the state control data (lighting) into the predetermined register, it is determined whether or not it is an advantageous section, and if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, the state control data (lighting off) is set to the predetermined register. Since the state control data is changed by reading, when reading the state control data (lighting) into the predetermined register, it is judged whether or not it is an advantageous section, and the state control data is read according to the result. The program capacity can be reduced. Further, after reading the state control data (lighting) into the predetermined register, it is determined whether or not the section is advantageous, and if it is determined that the section is not advantageous, the state control data of the predetermined register is used for state control. Since the data is changed to data (turned off), the state control data (turned off) is not read into the predetermined register when the section is advantageous, and then the state control data of the predetermined register is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. This process is performed, and it is possible to reliably prevent the advantageous section notification LED 12a from being controlled to the off state even though it is an advantageous section.

As a process of setting the state control data in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, for example, as shown in FIG. 21, it is first determined whether or not the section is advantageous, and if it is an advantageous section, the state control is performed. In order to have a configuration in which the data (lighting) is read into a predetermined register, a configuration in which it is determined twice whether or not it is an advantageous section (see FIG. 21A) or whether or not it is an advantageous section is determined. A configuration using a jump command that jumps to the process of making a determination, reading the state control data according to the determination result into a predetermined register, and then setting the state control data in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a (FIG. 21 (FIG. 21). b) See) etc. are conceivable. For such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, first, the state control data is read into a predetermined register, then it is determined whether or not it is an advantageous section, and the state of the predetermined register is determined according to the determination result. In a configuration in which the control data can be rewritten, it is possible to reduce the program capacity by one step or two steps.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 reads the state control data (lighting) into a predetermined register, determines whether or not the section is advantageous, and if it is determined that the section is not advantageous, the state control is performed. The configuration is such that the data for state control (off) is read into a predetermined register to change the state control data, but after the state control data (off) is read into the predetermined register, it is determined whether or not it is an advantageous section. When it is determined that the section is advantageous, the state control data (lighting) may be read into a predetermined register to change the state control data. With such a configuration, when determining whether or not the section is advantageous, even if an erroneous determination occurs in which the section is determined to be advantageous even though it is not an advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notification that the shift to the advantageous section has been made.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes an advantageous section notification LED 12a (eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the advantageous section has shifted and the advantageous section has ended. By controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended. In the main processing, the state control data (off) is sent to the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Before performing the setting process, in the AT state management process, the process of initializing the predetermined area in which the data relating to the advantageous section is stored in the RAM 41c is performed, and the data relating to the advantageous section is initialized.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent data related to the advantageous section from remaining in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c even though the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended. ..

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the data related to the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c before performing the process of setting the state control data (off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. This process initializes the data related to the advantageous section before controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state. However, at the same time as the control to turn off the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the advantageous section is turned off. It may be configured to initialize the data related to. For example, the process of setting the state control data (off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the process of initializing the data related to the advantageous section are performed in the timer interrupt process (main) performed at the same timing. By doing so, it is possible to perform the control of turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the process of initializing the data related to the advantageous section at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to initialize the data relating to the advantageous section before controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state, but it is advantageous after initializing the data relating to the advantageous section. The section notification LED 12a may be controlled to be turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data relating to the advantageous section from being initialized during the period in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment notifies that the advantageous section has been shifted by lighting, and notifies that the advantageous section has ended by turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12). 8 segments), and in the main process, the RAM 41c in which the data related to the advantageous section is stored in the AT state management process before the process of setting the state control data (off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed. The configuration is such that an initialization process for initializing a predetermined area is performed, and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c initialized by the initialization process does not include the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and is initialized by the initialization process. The data regarding the advantageous section is configured not to include the state control data (lighting) set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

According to this configuration, the state control data (lights up) set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a before the process of setting the state control data (lights off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed. However, since it is not initialized by the initialization process in the AT state management process, the advantageous section notification LED 12a can be reliably controlled to the lighting state until the advantageous section ends.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to the present invention and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which the bet number is set by using medals and credits as the game value has been described, but the slot in which the bet number is set by using the game ball as the game value has been described. It may be applied to machines or fully credited slot machines that set the number of bets using only credits as game value. When the game ball is used as the game value, for example, one medal can be associated with five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of bets using.

Further, the value is not limited to one using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. It may be. That is, it is possible to set the number of bets and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls are generated depending on the occurrence of a prize. A slot machine that can pay out any value may be applied.

Further, in the above-mentioned Examples and Modifications, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area. It can also be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by doing so.

A second embodiment of a slot machine, which is a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, will be described. Since the configuration of the slot machine of this embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, different points will be mainly described here.

The main control unit 41 of the first embodiment has, as a game section, a normal section in which navigation notification is not performed, and a game section in which navigation notification is executed at least once, which is advantageous as compared with the normal section. It is a configuration that can be controlled as a waiting section that is transferred to an advantageous section on condition that a special role is won. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment has a normal section in which the navigation notification is not performed and a game in which the navigation notification can be executed, which is advantageous as compared with the normal section. It is a configuration that can be controlled with the section.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment performs an AT lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state as a control state (ball ejection state) relating to the AT to be controlled when the game section is an advantageous section. With a configuration that can be controlled to a precursor period that suggests the possibility of shifting to the CZ state, a CZ state in which an AT lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state can be performed, and an AT state in which AT is controlled. be. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment is in the AT state in which the AT is controlled during the precursory period suggesting the possibility of shifting to the AT state as the control state (ball ejection state) relating to the AT. It is a configuration that can be controlled. In particular, it is a configuration that can shift from the normal section to the AT state via the precursory period.

Further, in the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment, when the game section is a normal section, an advantageous section transition combination (a lottery target combination related to the advantageous section, a lottery target combination related to the waiting section) is won in the internal lottery. The main control unit 41 of the second embodiment is advantageous when the advantageous section transition combination is won in the internal lottery when the game section is a normal section. It is configured to shift to an advantageous section by performing an advantageous section transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the section and winning the advantageous section transition.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment includes the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 as an advantageous section notification LED 12a, and when the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section By starting lighting of the notification LED 12a, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has started, and when the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. The configuration is such that the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment includes the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 as the AT state notification LED 12b, and the game section is in a precursory state from the normal section to the advantageous section. When shifting to, the AT status notification LED 12b is not turned on and the game section is controlled to the advantageous section. When the control state is changed from the precursor state to the AT state, the AT state notification LED 12b is started to light, so that the AT state notification LED 12b notifies that the AT state has started and ends the AT state. At times, by turning off the AT status notification LED 12b, the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended.

Further, when the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment starts lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the game of shifting to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a The main control unit 41 of the second embodiment is configured to notify that the advantageous section has started, but the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment shifts the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section, and then sets a predetermined AT state start condition (for example, advantageous). After shifting to the section, the game is a game after a predetermined number of games have been played, and the navigation target role in which the medals increase among the predetermined navigation target roles in the internal lottery, that is, the game is started. In a game in which a navigation target combination with a number of medals that is larger than the number of medals used to set the number of bets required for the game is won, and the control state related to AT is transferred to the AT state, the AT state is established. The lighting of the notification LED 12b is started, and the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT state has started.

Further, when the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section, the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment turns off the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the game of shifting to the normal section, which is more advantageous than the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Although it is configured to notify that the section has ended, the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment has decided that the game that ends the AT state during the advantageous section and that the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. In the game for ending the AT state, the AT state notification LED 12b is turned off, and the AT state notification LED 12b notifies that the AT state has ended.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment satisfies the end condition that is satisfied when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). Therefore, the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment is configured to control so as to end the advantageous section, but the number of games played in the advantageous section is a predetermined upper limit number of games (in this embodiment). It was used to set the end condition established by reaching 1500 games) or the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section (from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to the number of bets in the advantageous section). The number of medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals) is a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 2388 (from 2400 as the upper limit to the maximum number of payouts in the slot machine 1 (15)). The advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the termination conditions that is satisfied by subtracting and exceeding the number of sheets (3) used to set the bet number (3)) is satisfied. It is a configuration to control. In addition, the number of games in which the number of advantageous section games is subtracted by 1 from the maximum number of games (in this embodiment) instead of the end condition established by reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). If there is, it may be an end condition that is satisfied by exceeding 1499), and an end condition that is established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment). Alternatively, the termination condition may be set when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number (2389 in the present embodiment).

[About internal lottery and lottery about advantageous section]
The internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 includes an advantageous section transition combination that triggers an advantageous section transition lottery. The probability that the advantageous section transition combination can be won by the internal lottery is different depending on the set value set in the slot machine 1. On the other hand, in the lottery related to the advantageous section (advantageous section transition lottery, AT lottery, additional lottery), which is performed when the advantageous section transition combination is won in the internal lottery, regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1. , The lottery is done so that you can win with a uniform probability.

For example, in the advantageous section transition lottery that determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section as a lottery related to the advantageous section, the advantageous section transition combination won in the internal lottery is the same regardless of which set value is set. When it is a combination, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed so that it is determined with a uniform probability that the transition to the advantageous section will be made. In addition, as a lottery regarding the advantageous section, the advantageous section transition combination won in the internal lottery has the same role regardless of whether the AT lottery determines whether or not to shift to the AT state or in any set value. At a certain time, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed so that it is determined with a uniform probability that the transition to the AT state will be made. In addition, as a lottery regarding the advantageous section, whether it is an additional lottery that determines whether or not to add the number of AT games controlled to the AT state, or a situation where any set value is set, the advantageous section won by the internal lottery. When the transitional combinations are the same, the additional lottery is performed so that it is determined that the number of AT games will be added with a uniform probability. Based on the winning of the advantageous section transition combination that wins the internal lottery with a probability that differs depending on the set value, the lottery for the advantageous section that can be won with a uniform probability regardless of the set value is performed, so that the advantageous section is selected. As a result, the determination of the transition, the transition to the AT state, and the addition of the number of AT games will be determined with a probability of being different depending on the set value.

The probability that the advantageous section transition combination can be won by the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and is advantageous when the advantageous section transition combination is won. In the lottery related to the ward, by performing a lottery with a probability that there is a difference according to the set value, it is said that it will shift to an advantageous section, that it will shift to the AT state, and that the number of AT games will be added, depending on the set value. It may be configured to be determined with a probability of difference. In addition, whether it is an internal lottery in which the advantageous section transition combination can be won or a lottery related to the advantageous zone triggered by the winning of the advantageous section transition combination, the advantageous section can be drawn with a probability of being different depending on the set value. It may be configured to determine the transition to the AT state, the transition to the AT state, and the addition of the number of AT games with a probability of being different depending on the set value.

Hereinafter, the main process, the ball ejection control process, and the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

[About main processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the main process, the game start waiting process (Sp1), the internal lottery process (Sp2), and the ball ejection control process (Sp3) are sequentially executed. In the payout control process, as will be described later, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the game is a game after the predetermined AT state startable condition is satisfied, and the predetermined navigation is performed by the internal lottery. In a game in which a predetermined navigation notification is performed by winning a target combination, a process of shifting the control state related to AT to the AT state, setting an AT status notification flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and an output of the AT status notification LED 12b. Performs processing such as setting status control data (lighting) in the buffer and updating the advantageous section game number counter.

After performing the ball ejection control process in the step of Sp3, the reel control process (Sp4) is performed, and then the AT state management process (Sp5) is performed. In the AT state management process, the process of ending the advantageous section when the number of advantageous section games counted by the advantageous section game number counter reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, and counting the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. The process of updating the net increase number counter for the purpose, the process of ending the advantageous section when the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number, and the like are performed.

After performing the AT state management process in the step of Sp5, the medal payout process (Sp6) and the re-game operation time process (Sp7) are sequentially performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the AT state notification flag is set by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c where the AT state notification flag can be set by the ball ejection control process in the step of Sp3 (Sp8).

When it is determined that the AT status notification flag is not set in the step of Sp9, the status control data (off) for controlling the lighting mode of the AT status notification LED 12b to the off state is read into the predetermined register (Sp10). , The state control data (off) of the predetermined register is sent to the eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 among the output buffers provided for each output port in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Is set to the output buffer corresponding to the output port that outputs the data (hereinafter, may be referred to as an output buffer for the AT status notification LED) (Sp11). Then, after waiting for one interrupt (Sp12) and turning off the AT status notification LED 12b, the process proceeds to the step of Sp13. On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT status notification flag is set in the step of Sp9, the process proceeds to the step of Sp13 without performing each process of the steps of Sp10 to Sp12.

In the step of Sp13, the setting process at the end of the game is performed (Sp14). After that, the process returns to the step of Sp1 and each process of the steps of Sp1 to Sp13 is repeated.

In the main process of this embodiment, when the AT status notification flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the AT status is set by setting the status control data (off) in the output buffer for the AT status notification LED. If it is not controlled to, at the end of each game, the process of setting the status control data (off) in the output buffer for the AT status notification LED is performed, but the AT status notification flag is set. However, when the AT status notification LED 12b is in the lit state, the status control data (off) may be set in the output buffer for the AT status notification LED. In such a configuration, only in the game in which the AT state is terminated, the state control data (turning off) can be set in the output buffer for the AT state notification LED, and the process of turning off the AT state notification LED 12b can be performed. , The processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the main process, after the internal lottery process is performed, the ball ejection control process is performed during the reel control process to control the advantageous section, and the predetermined notification start condition is satisfied. , The state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer for the AT status notification LED to control the AT status notification LED 12b to the lighting state. Therefore, at the start of the game in which the predetermined notification start condition is satisfied, the AT status notification LED 12b Is started to light up, and the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has started.

Further, in the main processing, after performing the reel control processing and the re-game operation processing, it is determined whether or not the AT status notification flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the AT status notification flag is not set. In this case, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer for the AT status notification LED to turn off the AT status notification LED 12b. Therefore, when the AT status is terminated, the AT status termination condition (remaining AT game). At the end of the game in which the number becomes 0 and the advantageous section is terminated), the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off to notify that the AT status has ended.

[About ball ejection control processing]
The control content of the ball ejection control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the ball ejection control process, first, the section information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired (Sq1), and the game section currently controlled based on the section information is an advantageous section. It is determined whether or not it is (Sq2). When it is determined in the step of Sq2 that the currently controlled gaming section is not an advantageous section, a winning number is acquired by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sq3), and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section transition combination has been won. (Sq4). When it is determined that the advantageous section transition combination has been won in the step of Sq4, the advantageous section transition lottery process for performing the advantageous section transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is performed (Sq5). Then, it is determined whether or not the winner of the advantageous section transition lottery is determined to shift to the advantageous section (Sq6). If it is determined in the step of Sq6 that the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been won, the update data (advantageous section) of the section information is acquired in the predetermined register (Sq7), and the update data acquired in the predetermined register (Sq7). (Advantageous section) is used to update the section information to a value indicating the advantageous section (Sq8). Then, after performing the advantageous section start time setting process (Sq9), the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

Further, in the step of Sq4, when it is determined that the advantageous section transition combination has not been won based on the winning number, and when it is determined in the step of Sq6 that the advantageous section transition lottery has not been won, Sq5 to Sq9. The ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing each process of the step.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sq2 that the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the advantageous section game number counter (Sq10), and then the ball ejection state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. Based on the information, after acquiring the currently controlled payout state in a predetermined register (Sq11), the payout state-related processing is performed (Sq12).

In the payout state-related processing, the processing related to the currently controlled payout state is performed. The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control the ball ejection state to the precursory period and the AT state. As a process related to the payout state, when the currently controlled payout state is the precursory period, the number of games controlled in the precursory period (hereinafter, may be referred to as the precursory period game number) is counted. Processing and AT state start condition for starting the AT state (in this embodiment, the game is a game after the number of games in the precursor period reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games), and the payout rate (number of payouts / bet number). ) Is a game in which navigation notification is performed to notify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in which the value is larger than 1. It is a game after reaching the game), and the AT state is established when the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R whose payout rate is larger than 1 is established). A process for shifting to the sub-control unit 91, a process for transmitting a command capable of specifying that control is performed during the precursory period to the sub-control unit 91, and the like are performed.

Further, when the currently controlled ball ejection state is the AT state, the RAM 41c sets an AT state notification flag indicating that the AT state notification to notify the AT state is performed when the AT state is started. Processing to set in the predetermined area of, processing to update the remaining AT game number counter, processing to perform an additional lottery to determine whether or not to add the remaining AT game, AT once the advantageous section is continued at the end of the AT state, and AT again The process of performing a continuous lottery to determine whether or not to control the state, and when it is decided to control the AT state again by the time the number of remaining AT games becomes 0, the number of remaining AT games becomes 0. By doing so, the process of temporarily ending the AT state and shifting to the precursory period, the process of clearing the AT state notification flag from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the AT state is ended, and the time when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0. When it is not determined to control the AT state again, the number of remaining AT games becomes 0, and the arbitrary end condition establishment flag indicating that the arbitrary end condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A process for setting to, a process for transmitting a command that can specify that control is performed during the AT period to the sub-control unit 91, and the like are performed.

In this embodiment, navigation notification is performed to notify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are games after the number of games in the precursory period reaches a predetermined number of games and the payout rate is larger than 1. The AT state start condition is satisfied by becoming a game, but the AT state start condition is at least the stop switches 8L, 8C, in which the payout rate (payout number / bet number) becomes larger than 1 by the instruction setting process. Any configuration may be established by the time the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of 8R is performed, and the configuration may be established in the game before the game in which the navigation notification is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, by determining that the AT state is controlled again during the AT state, the AT state is once terminated and then the AT state is controlled again. However, when the AT state is terminated. Alternatively, the AT state may be controlled again by deciding to control the AT state again in a predetermined period after the AT state ends.

After performing the ball ejection state-related processing in the step of Sq12, it is determined whether or not the arbitrary end condition is satisfied based on whether or not the arbitrary end condition establishment flag is set (Sq13). When the arbitrary end condition establishment flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and it is determined that the arbitrary end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed (Sq14), and the advantageous section end flag is set to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Set in the area.

Then, after performing the advantageous section end flag setting process in the step of Sq14, it is determined whether or not the AT state notification flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sq15). If it is determined in the step of Sq13 that the arbitrary end condition establishment flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the process of the step of Sq14 is not performed and the process proceeds to the process of the step of Sq15.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sq15 that the AT status notification flag is set, the status control data (lighting) for controlling the display mode of the AT status notification LED 12b to the lighting state is read into the predetermined register. (Sq16), after setting the state control data (lighting) of the predetermined register in the AT state notification LED output buffer (Sq17), the instruction setting process is performed (Sq18). On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sq15 that the AT status notification flag is not set, each process in the step of Sq16 and the step of Sq17 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the step of Sq18 to perform the instruction setting process.

In the instruction setting process, when the control state related to AT is the AT state and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, a process of performing navigation notification according to the navigation target combination is performed. On the other hand, when the control state related to AT is not the AT state, processing is performed so that the navigation notification is not performed even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery.

Then, after performing the instruction setting process in the step of Sq18, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the ball ejection control process, the ball output control process is controlled in an advantageous section, and when a predetermined notification start condition (AT status notification flag is set) is satisfied, the output buffer for the AT status notification LED is in a state. Since the control data (lighting) is set and the AT status notification LED 12b is controlled to the lighting state, the AT status notification LED 12b is started to light at the start of the game in which the predetermined notification start condition is satisfied, and the AT status is concerned. The notification LED 12b can notify that the AT state has started.

[About AT state management processing]
The control content of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the AT state management process, first, the section information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the predetermined register (Sr1). Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is a standby section based on the section information (Sr2).

Then, when it is determined that the game section currently controlled in the step of Sr2 is an advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sr3). If it is determined in the step of Sr3 that the advantageous section end flag is not set, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section game number counter updated by the above-mentioned payout control process is referred to. (Sr4), it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) based on the advantageous section game number counter (Sr5).

When it is determined in the step of Sr5 that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section (payment in the advantageous section). Refer to the net increase number counter for counting (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used to set the bet number in the advantageous section from the total number of issued medals) (Sr6), and specify as the net increase number value. Get to the register. Then, the payout number value of the medal to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game is specified, and the payout number is added to the net increase number value of the predetermined register (Sr7). After that, the bet value set in the game is specified, and the bet value is subtracted from the net increase number value of the predetermined register to calculate a new net increase number (Sr8). Then, it is determined whether or not the new net increase number value calculated in the predetermined register is larger than 0 (Sr9).

If it is determined in the step of Sr9 that the net increase number value of the predetermined register is not larger than 0, the net increase number value is set to 0 and set in the predetermined register (Sr10), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sr11. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sr9 that the net increase number value of the predetermined register is larger than 0, the process of the step of Sr10 is not performed, the net increase number value of the predetermined register is maintained, and the process proceeds to the step of Sr11.

In the step of Sr11, it is determined whether or not the net increase number set in the predetermined register exceeds a predetermined predetermined number of sheets (2388 sheets in this embodiment) (Sr11). When it is determined in the step of Sr11 that the net increase number of the predetermined register does not exceed the specified number, the value of the net increase number counter is set by setting the net increase number of the predetermined register in the net increase number counter of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Is updated to a new net increase number value (Sr12).

After updating the net increase number counter to a new net increase number value in the step of Sr12, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Further, even when it is determined that the game section currently controlled in the step of Sr2 is not an advantageous section, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set in the step of Sr3, and if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit in the step of Sr5, the net increase in the number of medals in the step of Sr11 is increased. If it is determined that the number exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to the step of Sr13, and with the end of the control of the advantageous section, a predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored is initially set. The advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) to be converted is performed.

In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of times the process is executed is set in the predetermined register (D) as the initial value (1 in this embodiment) of the remaining number of times the initialization process is executed (Sr13). Then, the ROM 41b in which the RAM initialization data table capable of specifying the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas (capacity, the number of included addresses) to be initialized is stored. The address of the storage area is set in the predetermined register (HL) (Sr14). After that, the number of storage areas of the RAM 41c to be initialized is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL), and the number of initializations is the remaining number of times. In addition to setting to the predetermined register (B), the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b and set to the predetermined register (C) as the initialization target RAM address (C). Sr15).

Then, after the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sr16), it is predetermined in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C). By setting the initialization data set in the register (A), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sr17). After that, by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the initialization target RAM address is advanced by one (Sr18).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), after subtracting 1 from the remaining number of initializations (Sr19), it is determined whether or not the remaining number of initializations is larger than 0 (Sr20). If it is determined in the step of Sr20 that the number of remaining initializations is larger than 0, the process returns to the step of Sr17, and each process of Sr17 to Sr20 is repeated until the number of remaining initializations becomes 0. As a result, the storage area for the number of storage areas to be initialized is initialized with the initialization data from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table. ..

When it is determined in the step of Sr20 that the number of remaining initializations is not greater than 0, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table are initialized, the predetermined register (D) By subtracting 1 from the value, the number of remaining initialization processing executions is subtracted by 1 (Sr21), it is determined whether or not the number of remaining initialization processing executions after subtraction is 0 (Sr22), and the remaining initialization processing execution is executed. If the number of times is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sr15, and each process of the steps Sr15 to Sr22 is repeated until the number of times of execution of the remaining initialization process becomes 0, so that the advantageous section data initialization process is performed a predetermined number of times. Then, when the number of remaining initialization process executions becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control in the advantageous section includes the data related to the control of the AT state, and the predetermined area in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section in the RAM 41c is stored by the advantageous section data initialization process. By initializing, the data related to the control in the advantageous section and the data related to the control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous section is terminated and the AT state is terminated.

In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of times the initialization process is executed is set to 1, and the advantageous section data initialization process is performed once. However, the initial value of the number of times the initialization process is executed is set to a predetermined number of 2 or more. The advantageous section data initialization process may be performed a predetermined number of times of two or more times.

As described above, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. When the value is exceeded, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the data related to the advantageous section (including the data related to the AT state), thereby ending the advantageous section.

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. By setting the specified number to the specified number, it is advantageous over the specified number of games at the maximum. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the payout rate of medals in the section is within a predetermined ratio. For example, the specified number of medals is 2388 (the value obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of medals to be paid out in the slot machine 1 from the maximum number of 2400 medals and adding the number of medals (3) used for setting the bet number). By doing so, the net increase in the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section can be set to 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals between 1600 games can be set to 150% or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from paying out an excessive number of medals in a predetermined period. In addition, instead of the termination condition established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment), the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is The same applies to the case where the end condition is set by reaching the number of sheets (2389 in the case of this embodiment) obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number of sheets.

Further, in the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the predetermined number, the advantageous section is terminated. When the number of advantageous section games reaches the maximum number of games, by ending the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a long period of time, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. By ending the AT state and the advantageous section when the number exceeds, even if the number of advantageous section games does not reach the upper limit game number, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing when the payout rate suddenly increases. It has become like.

In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section. First, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sr5), and if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section. Advantageous section data initialization processing (Sr13 to Sr22) without performing processing for counting the number of sheets (Sr6 to Sr10) and processing for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (Sr11). I do. As a result, when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied because the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, the net increase in the number of medals, which is also the condition for ending the advantageous section, is the specified number. Since the process of determining that the number of medals exceeds (Sr11) and the process of counting the net increase in the number of medals initialized with the end of the advantageous section (Sr6 to Sr10) are not performed, the processing load can be reduced.

In the AT state management process of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sr5), and it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. The process (Sr11) is performed. First, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and if it is determined that the net increase exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the net increase number does not exceed the specified number, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. In such a configuration, as a condition for ending the advantageous section in the design of the slot machine 1, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as compared with the number of games in the advantageous section reaching the upper limit. In a configuration in which is likely to be satisfied, it is possible to preferentially determine whether or not the net increase in the number of medals, which is an end condition that is likely to be satisfied, exceeds the specified number, and when the end condition is satisfied, the other end. The processing load can be reduced without determining the conditions.

In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sr5), and if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games, it is in the advantageous section. It is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number (Sr11), and if it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sr13 to Sr22) is performed, which is advantageous. While controlling to end the section, if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit, a process (Sr11) for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number is performed. Instead, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) is performed to control the advantageous section to end, the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is increased. Even if either one of the exceeding the specified number is established or both of them are established in the same game, the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) is performed to end the advantageous section. Let me. As a result, even if the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of the number of games and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as the end condition of the advantageous section, either one is satisfied at the same time. The advantageous section can be terminated by performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) in which the same region is initialized without any difference from the case where only the case is established.

Further, in the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sr5), and it is advantageous when it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games. It is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the section exceeds the specified number (Sr11), and if it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) is performed. While controlling to end the advantageous section, when it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit, a process (Sr11) for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number is performed. The configuration is such that the advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) is performed to end the advantageous section without performing the operation, and even when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the medal in the advantageous section Even when the net increase number exceeds the specified number, the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) is performed to end the advantageous section. As a result, the common advantageous section data is established regardless of whether the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as the end condition of the advantageous section. Since the initialization process is performed, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) in which the same region is initialized without any difference can be performed to end the advantageous section.

Further, in the AT state management process, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the value of the net increase number counter is acquired in a predetermined register as the net increase number value, the payout number value is added to the net increase number value, and the bet value is set. If the value obtained by subtracting is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the increase / decrease in the number of medals tends to decrease. , And when it is smaller than the reference value (value of net increase number at the start of advantageous section (initial value 0)), the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, and when the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, it tends to increase. The increased / decreased number of sheets after becoming the value of the net increase number counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), after shifting to the advantageous section, the number of medals to be increased or decreased tends to decrease without navigation notification being performed during the controlled precursor period, and the number of increased or decreased medals is displayed on the net increase counter. If the value of the net increase counter is lower than the initial value (0 in this embodiment) by adding, the value of the net increase counter is set over the period when the increase / decrease number of medals is lower than the initial value. , 0. After that, when the number of medals is increased or decreased by being controlled to the AT state and the stop operation is performed according to the navigation notification, the value of the net increase counter is the value corresponding to the net increase of medals ( The value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number value) is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the value of the net increase number counter is based on the increase / decrease number of medals when the increase / decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing tendency to an increasing tendency, that is, when the increasing / decreasing number of medals becomes the lowest value. It is designed to indicate the number of sheets increased from the value.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25B, after the increase / decrease number of medals once exceeds the initial value of the net increase number counter, it tends to decrease and falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment) again. If this is the case, the number of medals will be 0 for a period of time when the number of medals is less than the initial value. After that, as the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, the value of the net increase number counter is updated by sequentially adding the value for the net increase number of medals (the value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number value). As a result, as described above, the value of the net increase number counter is based on the increase / decrease number of medals when the increase / decrease number of medals becomes the lowest value, as in the case of shifting to the AT state from the precursory period. , The value indicates the number of sheets increased from the reference value.

Further, in the AT state management process, a calculated value obtained by adding the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter value and then subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase counter value during the advantageous section is obtained. , If it is larger than 0, the value obtained by adding the payout number value to the net increase number counter value and subtracting the bet value is set in the net increase number counter and updated, while the calculated value is smaller than 0. By performing the process of setting 0 to the net increase number counter and updating each game, if the net increase number becomes a negative value in the advantageous section, the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and the net increase number is changed from 0 again. Since the net increase counter is updated so as to start counting, it is possible to directly specify the increase width (net increase) of medals in the transition of the actual increase / decrease number of medals in the advantageous section as the net increase counter value (Fig.). 25 (a)).

In this embodiment, by performing a process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous section, counting of the net increase number of medals is started from the time of shifting to the advantageous section, and the net increase during the advantageous section is started. Although the configuration is such that the number of sheets is counted, the process of updating the net increase number counter is not performed when the number of sheets is not in the AT state during the advantageous section, and the process of updating the net increase number counter is performed when the number of sheets is in the AT state during the advantageous section. good. Even with such a configuration, the net increase in the number of medals does not increase when the navigation notification is not performed in the AT state, and the net increase in the number of medals increases when the navigation notification is performed in the AT state. Similar to the configuration in which the process of updating the net increase number counter is performed while the number of medals is medium, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section can be counted.

As shown in FIG. 25 (a), for example, after the transition to the advantageous section, in the precursory period when the navigation notification is not performed, the prize with a payout rate exceeding 1 does not occur, and the number of medals increased or decreased falls below the reference value. In the case of such a change, the number of medals increased / decreased tends to increase from the game in which the navigation notification is started after shifting to the advantageous section after shifting to the advantageous section, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section in the game tends to increase. The least. In the precursory period after the shift to the advantageous section, the navigation notification is not performed, but a prize with a payout rate of more than 1 may occur. If a prize with a payout rate of more than 1 occurs in the precursory period so that the increase / decrease in the number of medals in the precursory period tends to increase monotonically, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section will be increased in the game shifted to the advantageous section. The least. In addition, if the payout rate exceeds 1 during the precursory period, the number of medals will increase or decrease after the number of medals increases or decreases once falls below the standard value. In the game, the net increase in the number of cards in the advantageous section is the smallest. In this way, the time point at which the net increase in the number of sheets is the smallest in the advantageous section may change depending on the situation. On the other hand, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires the value of the net increase number counter as a net increase number value in a predetermined register and pays out to the net increase number value. If the value obtained by adding the numerical value and subtracting the bet numerical value is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0 in the game in which the increase / decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing tendency to an increasing tendency. , The net increase number counter is reset, and the net increase number value is counted from 0 again. From the time when the net increase number is the smallest in the advantageous section, the net increase number is counted and the accurate net increase number is counted. You can do it.

Further, in this embodiment, by performing a process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous section, counting of the net increase number of medals is started from the time of shifting to the advantageous section, and the net increase during the advantageous section is started. Although it is configured to count the number of sheets, it may be configured to perform a process of updating the net increase number of sheets counter regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section. In such a configuration, if the net increase in medals tends to increase in the section before the transition to the advantageous section, the net increase in medals in the section is taken over and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is counted. Can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate can be set to 1 or more by performing the stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification. , The medal payout rate is less than 1 by performing the stop operation in an operation mode other than the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification. By following the navigation notification, the number of medals increased / decreased tends to increase, while the number of medals increased / decreased tends to decrease in states other than the AT state. Therefore, the AT state notification LED 12b is controlled to be lit in the AT state. As a result, it is notified that the number of medals increased or decreased in the advantageous section is the period in which the number of medals increases or decreases.

In the AT state management process of this embodiment, when the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case where the value is exceeded, the advantageous section is terminated by performing the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sr13 to Sr22) and initializing the data related to the advantageous section (including the data related to the AT state). In the configuration to be performed, that is, in the AT state management process, regardless of the end condition of the established advantageous section, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed to uniformly initialize the data related to the advantageous section and terminate the advantageous section. Although it is configured, at the end of the advantageous section, the data regarding the advantageous section corresponding to the end condition of the established advantageous section may be initialized and the advantageous section may be terminated.

In this embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section is added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. If the predetermined small winning combination with the payout is won, the predetermined small winning combination wins and the medal is paid out regardless of whether or not the predetermined small winning combination is actually paid out as a result of the game. It may be configured to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section by adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase number counter on the assumption that the medals have been paid out. In such a configuration, when a predetermined small winning combination is won in an internal lottery in an advantageous section, it is considered that the predetermined small winning combination has won and the medals have been paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out is counted as a net increase number counter. Therefore, by intentionally missing the predetermined small winning combination, it is possible to prevent the net increase number counter from exceeding the specified number and intentionally extending the number of games in the advantageous section.

In addition, when the predetermined small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the predetermined small winning combination wins and the medal is awarded regardless of whether or not the predetermined small winning combination is actually paid out as a result of the game. In the configuration where the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted by assuming that the medals have been paid out and adding the medals for the amount to be paid out to the net increase number counter, a lottery including a small winning combination with the payout of medals in the internal lottery. If the target role is won, regardless of whether or not the player can reliably win the small role, if the small role wins, it will be paid out by winning the small role. In addition to adding the medals for the number of medals to the net increase counter, if the lottery target winning combination including the small winning combination with the payout of medals is won in the internal lottery, the player can surely win the small winning combination. If the medal cannot be won despite the situation, for example, the navigation target role is won as the lottery target role in the internal lottery, and the stop switches 8L and 8C are advantageous for the player by the navigation notification. , The operation mode of 8R is notified, so that the predetermined small winning combination included in the navigation target combination can be won a prize, but the operation mode is different from the notified operation mode. If the specified small winning combination cannot be won, or if the specific small winning combination is won and the operation is performed in a certain operation mode (operation at the operation timing within the pull-in range of the specific combination, etc.), the specific small combination must be operated. It is possible for a player to win a medal when a specific small winning combination cannot be won by being operated in an operation mode other than a certain operation mode even though it is possible to win a medal. By assuming that the small winning combination has won and the medals have been paid out, and adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is counted, while the internal lottery If a lottery target winning combination including a small winning combination with a medal payout is won and the player cannot reliably win the small winning combination, for example, an internal lottery. In a situation where the navigation target role is won as the lottery target combination and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player by the navigation notification, is not notified, the predetermined small combination included in the navigation target combination is selected. If it is not possible to win a prize, it is preferable to have a configuration that does not add to the net increase number counter, and by such a configuration, the player can surely increase the number of medals. If this is not possible, the net increase counter will be added only when the number of medals actually increases, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds the value for the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter and sets the bet number. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medals used in is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, so that the increase / decrease number of medals is 0 in the net increase number counter. When the value is lower than 0, the value less than 0 is not counted, and only the value higher than 0 is counted. However, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase counter to 0 by the start of the advantageous section, and then counts the value. In the advantageous section, when the medals are paid out, the value for the number of paid out medals is added to the net increase counter, and when the medals are used to set the number of bets, the value for the number of medals is added. By repeating the process of subtracting from the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section, the number of medals increased or decreased may be less than 0 or more than 0. In such a configuration, when the increase / decrease number of medals is less than 0, the net increase number counter is not corrected to 0, so that the process of counting the net increase number by the net increase number counter can be simplified.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and the medal used for setting the bet number. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is changed to the net increase counter. By controlling so as to update the value of the net increase number counter so as to be the value of, the net increase number of medals is counted starting from the time when the net increase number of medals decreases most after the start of the advantageous section. Since the timing at which the net increase in medals decreases most after the start of the advantageous section can change depending on the situation, the starting point of the net increase in medals specified based on the net increase counter in this embodiment depends on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 starts counting the net increase in the number of medals by the net increase counter from the time when the trigger is uniformly set after the start of the advantageous section, and the trigger is set. The advantageous section may be terminated when the net increase in medals up to the present starting point is counted and the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number.

For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number of medals, the advantageous section As a configuration to end, the count by the net increase number counter is started from the time when the normal section is changed to the advantageous section, and the net increase number of medals up to the present starting from the time when the normal section is changed to the advantageous section is the specified number of medals. If it exceeds the limit, the advantageous section may be terminated. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net increase of medals starting from the time other than the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is set. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the above, it is possible to simplify the control of determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number. As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, when it is suggested that the AT state notification LED 12b has changed to the AT state after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the operation mode for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, When the net increase in the number of medals up to now, which is the starting point, exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be transferred. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase number of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the AT status notification LED 12b makes the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number of medals starting from the time other than when it is suggested that the transition has been made and the operation mode for increasing the number of medals is notified by the navigation notification, the net increase number is not required. It is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the counter.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number. As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, it is suggested that after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the AT status notification LED 12b shifts to the AT state regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. When the number of medals to be increased from the starting point to the present exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be transferred. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase number of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the medals by the navigation notification is performed. Regardless of whether or not the mode has been notified, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from the time other than when the AT status notification LED 12b suggests that the section has shifted to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, so that the advantageous section is controlled to end. However, in the AT state management process, a bet is made in each game. The advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined specified number by counting only the number of medals to be paid out in each game without counting the number of medals used to set the number. It may be configured to be controlled in such a manner. For example, the specified number of total payouts is 2865 (net increase number (2400) in which the payout rate of medals between 1600 games is 150%) and the shortest number of games (160 games = 2400/1) to which the net increase number of medals is given. From the total value of the number of medals used to set the number of bets (480 = 160 games x the specified number of 3 per game) in the maximum number of payouts per game (15)), the payout in one game on the slot machine 1 As a value obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of sheets), when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. The maximum net increase in the number of medals to be paid out in is 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals between 1600 games can be 150% or less. It should be noted that the same effect can be obtained even if the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (specified number + 1) to end the advantageous section.

[Transition of display mode of game auxiliary display, etc. at the start of AT state]
The transition of the display modes of the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the input request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 at the start of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

The main control unit 41 executes the above-mentioned main process, and performs the game start waiting process and the ball ejection control process. The display modes of LEDs 20, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled.

FIG. 26 describes the timing at which the AT state notification LED 12b notifies that the AT state has started when the AT state start condition is satisfied and the AT state is started when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section. This will be described based on (a).

As shown in FIG. 26A, in the game start waiting process, when there is a vacancy in the credit or the number of bets and the medal can be inserted, the insertion request LED 17 is started to light. After that, the number of bets is set by inserting medals or operating the MAXBET switch 6, so that the corresponding 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially started to light. Then, when the specified number of bets is set, the start effective LED 18 is started to light.

In this state, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and perform an internal lottery. After that, in the ball ejection control process, when the AT state start condition is satisfied according to the lottery result of the internal lottery, the AT state is started, the AT state notification flag is set, and the AT state notification flag is set. As a result, the status control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b. Further, by the instruction setting process during the ball ejection control process, the navigation display data for performing the navigation notification according to the lottery result of the internal lottery is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. In this state, when the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, each segment (left side) of the game auxiliary display 12 corresponding to the navigation display of the navigation notification (for example, the display of the navigation number indicating the right first stop operation). The 1st, 3rd, 4th, 6th, and 7th segments of the display 12L and the 4th segment of the right side display 12R) and the 8th segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 corresponding to the AT status notification are lit. It starts at the same time.

Then, after the ball ejection control process is completed, the reel control process is performed, and after the wait has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the previous game, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate. Will be started.

Further, when the main control unit 41 decides to shift to the AT state in the ball ejection related processing in the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 decides to shift to the AT state and the timing to shift to the AT state. When a identifiable command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 and the state is shifted to the AT state, a command that can be specified to start the AT state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 specifies that the AT state is started on the main control unit 41 side at the start of the game based on the command received from the main control unit 41. Uses a liquid crystal display 51 or the like to perform an AT transition confirmation notification to notify that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed. In the AT transition confirmation notification, for example, a confirmation screen (for example, a character image of "AT state transition confirmed!") Suggesting that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. , Notifies that it is confirmed that the state will be changed to the AT state. Further, by outputting a definite sound (for example, a fanfare sound) suggesting that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed from the speakers 53 and 54, the fact that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed has been confirmed. Notify. As a result, in the game that shifts to the AT state in the ball ejection control process by the main control unit 41, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned on and the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started at the same time at the start of the game. At the same time, the AT transition confirmation notification is performed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In this way, the main control unit 41 controls the AT status notification LED 12b to start lighting when the AT state is started in the ball ejection control process performed at the start of the game, so that the game is controlled by the AT. Notifies that the AT state has started at the start of.

Further, when the main control unit 41 starts lighting the AT status notification LED 12b, the main control unit 41 starts lighting the AT status notification LED 12b at the same time as the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started. By the time the navigation notification is performed in the state, the AT state notification LED 12b is started to light up to notify that the AT state has started.

Further, the main control unit 41 controls the game ejection control process to start the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12, and then performs the reel control process to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Is controlled, after the game is started in response to the operation of the start switch 7, the navigation display of the navigation notification is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate at a constant speed. Let's get started.

In this embodiment, the AT status notification LED 12b is started to light at the same time as the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started. However, in the ball ejection control process, the AT status notification LED 12b is output. The status control data (lights up) is set in the buffer, and after one interrupt wait processing is performed, the navigation display data for navigation notification is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 by the instruction setting process. As shown in FIG. 26B, the AT status notification LED 12b may be started to light, and then the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 may be started. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting the AT state notification LED 12b and notify that the AT state has started by the time the navigation notification is performed in the AT state.

Further, in the configuration in which the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started after the lighting of the AT status notification LED 12b is started, the subsequent processing is predetermined after the lighting of the AT status notification LED 12b is started. It is also possible to perform a delay process intentionally delaying over a predetermined period of time, and when the predetermined period elapses, the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game assist display 12 may be started. In such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 can be made to perform the AT transition confirmation notification within a predetermined period in which the delay processing is performed, and after the AT transition confirmation notification is performed, the game assist display is displayed. The navigation display of the navigation notification on the device 12 can be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting the AT status notification LED 12b and start the navigation display of the navigation notification in the ball ejection control process. After starting the lighting of the AT status notification LED 12b in the process, when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started in the reel control process, the navigation display of the navigation notification may be controlled to be started. In such a configuration, at the start of the game in which the AT state is started, when a predetermined period of wait, that is, a predetermined fixed period has elapsed from the start of the previous game, after the lighting of the AT state notification LED 12b is started. In addition, the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 will be started. When the predetermined period of the wait has elapsed at the start of the game in which the AT state is started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate almost at the same time as the AT state notification LED 12b starts lighting. At the same time as the start, the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting the AT status notification LED 12b and start the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 in the ball ejection control process. There is a configuration in which the AT status notification LED 12b is started to light at the start of the game for starting the navigation display of the navigation notification, but the main control unit 41 starts the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, at a predetermined timing until the end of the game (for example, when the third stop operation is completed, when the payout of medals is completed, when the granting of the re-game is completed, etc.), the AT status notification LED 12b It may be configured to start lighting.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to notify the AT transition confirmation at the start of the game when the AT state is specified to be started on the main control unit 41 side, and is the main. The AT transition confirmation notification is performed when the AT status notification LED 12b starts lighting on the control unit 41 side, but the sub control unit 91 starts the AT state on the main control unit 41 side. In the game, the AT transition confirmation notification may be performed at a timing before the lighting of the AT status notification LED 12b is started on the main control unit 41 side. Further, the sub control unit 91 starts the AT state on the main control unit 41 side from the time when it is specified that it is determined to shift to the AT state based on the command received from the main control unit 41. The AT transition confirmation notification may be performed at any timing within the period up to the time, that is, at the timing before the AT state starts.

Further, in this embodiment, the AT status notification LED 12b is started to light at the start of the game for starting the navigation display of the navigation notification. However, after it is decided to shift to the AT state, the navigation notification navigation is started. The AT status notification LED 12b may be started to light before the game for which the display is started. In this case, the sub control unit 91 may also be configured to perform the AT transition confirmation notification at the timing when the main control unit 41 starts lighting the AT status notification LED 12b after the determination to shift to the AT state is made.

[Transition of display mode of game auxiliary display, etc. at the end of AT state]
The transition of the display mode of the game assist display 12, the AT status notification LED 12b, the input request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 at the end of the AT state will be described.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls the AT state notification LED 12b to be turned off at the same timing as when the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment turns off the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

Although not particularly shown, when the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the predetermined small combination ends. When the symbol combination of is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, so that the reels are reeled. After the control process is completed, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of the predetermined small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the medal payout process, and then on the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b by the main process. The status control data (off) is set, and the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. As a result, the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended. Further, after that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

Further, when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the AT state ends, the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed, and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is performed. After that, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b by the main process, and the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting process that is performed thereafter. That is, after the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended during the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective.

Further, when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the AT state ends, the predetermined small combination is missed. When the combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended, and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is performed. The status control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b by the main processing without controlling the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated by the medal payout process. , AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. As a result, the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended. After that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

In addition, when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the AT state ends, the predetermined small combination is missed. When the combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is performed. After that, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b by the main process, and the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting process that is performed thereafter. That is, after the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended during the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective.

In addition, when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the AT state ends, the predetermined small combination is missed. When the combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not updated by the medal payout process, and the main process is used. The status control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b, and the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination is won as the winning combination in the internal lottery, and the predetermined combination is terminated when the AT state ends. When the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control processing is completed, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the predetermined small winning combination by the medal payout processing is the game assistance. It is displayed on the display 12, and then the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b by the main process, and the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. That is, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and when the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The timing is different.

Further, when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the lottery target combination including the re-game combination A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the re-game combination is terminated when the AT state ends. When the symbol combination of A or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are operated. By stopping the rotation, after the reel control process is completed, the process at the time of replay operation is performed and the lighting of the LED 20 during replay is started, and then the state is controlled in the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b by the main process. Data (turns off) is set, and the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. As a result, the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended. Further, after that, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started from the game start waiting process, and then the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started.

Further, when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the lottery target combination including the re-game combination A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the re-game combination ends. When the symbol combination of A or the symbol combination of the replay combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the replaying LED 20 is started to be lit by the process at the time of replay operation. After that, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the AT status notification LED 12b by the main process, and the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. That is, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off even when the symbol combination of the re-game combination A is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and when the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The timing is common.

[Action effect 4]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, the main control unit 41 can end the AT state by satisfying the end condition of the AT state. The AT status notification LED 12b (the eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the AT status has ended is provided, and the AT status notification LED 12b is controlled to be in the lighting state when the AT state is in the AT state. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform the predetermined small combination according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop any of the symbol combinations of the symbol combination and the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small combination on the reel, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the lottery target combination including the predetermined small combination as a winning combination, and the AT state is set. In the case of ending, when the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed to the predetermined small winning combination. The display mode is updated to indicate the final number of medals to be paid out due to winning, and then the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off to notify that the AT status has ended by the AT status notification LED 12b, while the predetermined small winning combination is missed. When the symbol combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off, and the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended. The AT state is terminated by the AT status notification LED 12b depending on whether the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel or the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel. The configuration is such that the timing at which the notification is notified is different.

According to this configuration, the AT state can be terminated when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, and at this time, according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. There are cases where the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel and the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel. Since the timing at which the AT state notification LED 12b notifies that the AT state has ended differs depending on whether the symbol combination is stopped, the notification by the AT status notification LED 12b can be focused on.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is a case where the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and the AT state ends, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel. The timing at which the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended differs depending on whether the combination of the missed symbols of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, but the main control unit 41 wins a prize. When the AT state ends with a lottery target combination including the first small combination and the second small combination with different payouts, and the symbol combination of the first small combination is stopped on the reel, the third stop After the stop switch related to the operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to the display mode indicating the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the first small winning combination, and then the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. , While notifying that the AT state has ended by the AT state notification LED 12b, when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, The AT status notification LED 12b may be turned off and the AT status notification LED 12b may be used to notify the end of the AT status. In such a configuration, it is the first time from when the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released until the final number of medals paid out by winning the first small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. , The second time from when the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released until the final number of medals to be paid out due to the winning of the second small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, is the first small winning combination. Since the time differs according to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of payouts of the second small winning combination, the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the lottery target combination including the first small winning combination and the second small winning combination, and the first small winning combination. When the symbol combination of the winning combination is stopped on the reel and when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the timing at which the AT status notification is notified by the AT status notification LED 12b is different. It is possible to pay attention to the notification by the AT state notification LED 12b.

In addition, the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the lottery target combination including the first small winning combination and the second small winning combination, and the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel and the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is on the reel. As a configuration in which the timing at which the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended differs depending on whether the AT status notification LED 12b is stopped, for example, in the main control unit 41, the lottery result of the internal lottery is the same as the number of payouts associated with winning. When the AT state ends with a lottery target combination including the 1st small combination and the 2nd small combination, and the symbol combination of the 1st small combination is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the 3rd stop operation is set. After being released, the display mode of the game assist display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the first small winning combination, and after waiting for a predetermined waiting time, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned on. The light is turned off and the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended. On the other hand, when the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released. After that, after updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the second small winning combination, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off without waiting for a predetermined waiting time. The AT status notification LED 12b may be configured to notify the end of the AT status. In such a configuration, the AT state is terminated by the AT status notification LED 12b depending on whether the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel or the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel. The timing of notification can be intentionally different by a predetermined waiting time, and the notification by the AT status notification LED 12b can be focused on.

Further, in the main control unit 41, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a winning combination and becomes a lottery target combination including the first replaying combination and the second replaying combination, the AT state ends, and the first replaying combination When the symbol combination of is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the watch waits for a predetermined standby time, and when the standby time elapses, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. Then, while the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended, when the symbol combination of the second replaying combination is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released. Later, the AT status notification LED 12b may be turned off without waiting for a predetermined standby time, and the AT status notification LED 12b may be controlled to notify that the AT status has ended. In such a configuration, the AT state is terminated by the AT status notification LED 12b in the case where the symbol combination of the first replaying combination is stopped on the reel and the case where the symbol combination of the second replaying combination is stopped on the reel. The timing at which the notification is notified can be intentionally different by a predetermined waiting time, and the notification by the AT status notification LED 12b can be focused on.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can settle the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10. In the main process, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and the AT state ends, the main control unit 41 may combine the symbols of the predetermined small combination or the predetermined small combination. After the combination of missed medals is stopped on the reels, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off and the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended, and then the game start waiting process is executed. In the operation input acceptance process during the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and AT. When the state is terminated, the AT status is changed by the AT status notification LED 12b during the period from when the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination or the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective. It is a configuration to notify that it has ended.

According to this configuration, since it is notified that the AT state has ended in the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes valid, the player ends the game after recognizing that the AT state has ended. Can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, the main control unit 41 can end the AT state by satisfying the end condition of the AT state. The main control unit 41 has a lottery result of the internal lottery. When the winning combination is a lottery target combination including the re-gaming combinations A and B, either the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination A or the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination B is performed according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to stop the symbol combination of the above on the reel, and when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the re-game combination A and B as a winning combination and the AT state is terminated, the re-game combination A When the symbol combination or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the LED 20 is controlled to be lit during replay, and then the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. Then, while the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended, when the missed symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released. , The AT status notification LED 12b is turned off, and the AT status notification LED 12b is controlled to notify that the AT status has ended. The timing at which the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended is the same when the combination of missed symbols of the small winning combination is stopped on the reel.

According to this configuration, the AT state can be terminated when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the replaying combinations A and B as a winning combination, and at this time, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Depending on the operation order, the symbol combination of the re-game combination A may be stopped on the reel, or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B may be stopped on the reel, and the symbol combination of the re-game combination A may be stopped. Since the timing at which the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended is the same as when the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped, the suggestion from the AT status notification LED 12b confuses the player. Can be prevented.

Further, the main control unit 41 is a case where the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the first small combination and the second small combination having the same number of payouts due to winning, and the AT state ends. When the symbol combination of is stopped on the reel, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is set to the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the first small winning combination. After updating to the display mode shown, when the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off and the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended, while the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel. After the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to a display mode showing the final number of medals to be paid out by winning the second small winning combination, and then the AT status notification The LED 12b may be turned off and the AT status notification LED 12b may be controlled to notify that the AT status has ended. In such a configuration, the AT state is terminated by the AT status notification LED 12b depending on whether the symbol combination of the first small winning combination is stopped on the reel or the symbol combination of the second small winning combination is stopped on the reel. The timing of notification can be made common, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the suggestion by the AT status notification LED 12b.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can settle the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10. In the main process, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and the AT state is terminated, the main control unit 41 combines the symbols of the re-game combination A or the re-game. After the symbol combination of the winning combination B is stopped on the reels, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off and the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended, and then the game start waiting process is executed. In the operation input acceptance process during the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled, and the lottery result of the internal lottery is a lottery target including the re-game combinations A and B as winning combinations. When the combination is played and the AT state is terminated, the AT status notification LED 12b is used during the period from when the symbol combination of the replaying combination A or the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reel until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective. It is a configuration that notifies that the AT state has ended.

According to this configuration, since it is notified that the AT state has ended in the period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes valid, the player ends the game after recognizing that the AT state has ended. Can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, the main control unit 41 can end the AT state by satisfying the end condition of the AT state. The main control unit 41 is provided with an AT status notification LED 12b (8th segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the AT status has ended, and the main control unit 41 has a lottery result of the internal lottery. When a winning combination includes a predetermined small combination, the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination can be stopped on the reel according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the internal lottery can be performed. When the lottery result becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination and the AT state is terminated, and the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination is stopped on the reel, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is set. After being released, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to a display mode indicating the final number of medals to be paid out by winning a predetermined small winning combination, and then the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off and the AT status notification LED 12b is used. It is controlled to notify that the AT state has ended, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small winning combination as a winning combination, and when the AT state ends, the game auxiliary display is displayed. The AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended at the timing after the display of the number of medals to be paid out by 12 is completed.

According to this configuration, the AT state can be terminated when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, and at this time, a symbol of the predetermined small combination accompanied by the number of medals to be paid out. The combination may be stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and when the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is stopped, the timing after the display of the number of medals to be paid out by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed is completed. Since the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended, it is possible to notify that the AT status has ended after recognizing that the medal has been paid out.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, the main control unit 41 can end the AT state by satisfying the end condition of the AT state. It is configured to include an AT status notification LED 12b (8th segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the AT status has ended, and the main control unit 41 has a lottery result of the internal lottery. When a lottery target combination including re-game combinations A and B is selected as a winning combination, it is possible to stop the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination on the reel according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the re-game combination A and B as a winning combination and the AT state is terminated, the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B stops on the reel. If this is the case, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off after the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be in the lit state, and the AT status is terminated by the AT status notification LED 12b. It is controlled so as to notify the fact that it has been done, and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including the replaying roles A and B as a winning combination, and when the AT state is terminated, the LED 20 is lit during replay. Is configured to notify the end of the AT state by the AT state notification LED 12b at the timing after the notification to the effect that the re-game has been granted is completed.

According to this configuration, the AT state can be terminated when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, and at this time, the re-gaming combination A accompanied by the addition of the re-gaming combination. When the symbol combination or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reel, and the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped, the lighting of the LED 20 during replay is started. Since the AT status notification LED 12b suggests that the advantageous section has ended at the timing after the notification that the re-game has been granted is completed, the AT is made to recognize that the re-game has been granted. It can be suggested that the state has ended.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, the main control unit 41 can end the AT state by satisfying the end condition of the AT state. The main control unit 41 has a lottery result of the internal lottery. When the winning combination is a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination, the symbol combination of the predetermined small combination or the missing symbol combination of the small combination is stopped on the symbol combination reel according to the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small winning combination and the AT state is terminated, the symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination or the missing symbol combination of the predetermined small winning combination is possible. When the reels are stopped, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released, and after the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off to turn off the AT status. The notification LED 12b notifies that the AT state has ended, and then controls to start lighting the input request LED 17, and the lottery result of the internal lottery is a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination. When the AT state is terminated, it is notified that the medal can be inserted by starting the lighting of the insertion request LED 17 after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating. At the timing before the reeling is performed, the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended.

According to this configuration, the AT state can be terminated when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a lottery target combination including a predetermined small combination as a winning combination, and at this time, all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated. After the game is stopped, the AT status notification LED 12b notifies that the AT status has ended at the timing before the insertion request LED 17 notifies that the medal can be inserted, so that the AT status has ended. It is possible to prevent the player from throwing a medal to start the next game without knowing.

[Action effect 5]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player in connection with the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player and the winning of the small winning combination. During the period in which the game auxiliary display 12 is provided and controlled to the AT state, the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be in the lighting state as the AT state notification LED 12b, thereby shifting to the AT state. The configuration is such that a part of the game auxiliary display 12 is used as the AT status notification LED 12b to notify that the AT status has been entered and that the advantageous section has ended.

According to this configuration, as a display means for notifying that the AT state has been entered, it is not necessary to provide a display means separate from the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the navigation notification and the number of medals paid out in the main control unit 41. ..

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 uses a part of the game assist display 12 as the AT status notification LED 12b to notify that the AT state has been entered and that the AT state has ended. A display means provided separately from the display 12 may be used as the AT state notification LED 12b to notify that the AT state has been entered. For example, the game auxiliary display 12 may be located in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display 12. May be configured to arrange a separate display means such as an LED or a lamp and use the display means to notify that the AT state has been entered and that the AT state has ended.

According to this configuration, separately from the game assist display 12, a display means for notifying that the AT state has been entered and that the AT state has ended is provided, so that a display for notifying that the AT state has been entered is displayed. It can be clearly distinguished from other displays and recognized, and even in this case, since it is provided in the vicinity of the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it.

In addition, various display means for notifying that the AT state has been entered and that the AT state has ended are, for example, a credit display 11 provided in the game display unit 13, a game auxiliary display 12, an input request LED 17, and the like. By arranging the display on the substrate on which the display or the like is arranged, the display means can be provided in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display 12, and oversight by the player can be prevented. Further, by arranging display means for notifying the transition to the AT state, for example, around switches operated at the start or end of the game such as MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, and settlement switch 10. , It is possible to prevent oversight by the player.

In this embodiment, when the AT state is entered, the AT state notification LED 12b is started to light, and when the AT state is ended, the AT state notification LED 12b is turned off even if the advantageous section continues. , Even if the advantageous section continues, when the AT state is entered, after the AT status notification LED 12b is started to light up, if the advantageous section continues even after the AT state ends, the AT status notification The end condition is established when the LED 12b is continuously lit and the advantageous section ends, that is, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). Or, the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section (the number of medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used to set the bet number in the advantageous section from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section). ) Exceeds a predetermined predetermined number of sheets (2388 sheets in this embodiment), and when at least one of the end conditions is satisfied and the advantageous section ends, the AT status notification LED 12b is turned off. It may be configured to make it.

Further, even if the advantageous section continues, if the advantageous section continues even after the AT state ends after starting the lighting of the AT state notification LED 12b when shifting to the AT state, the AT state. If the configuration is such that the notification LED 12b is continuously turned on and the AT state notification LED 12b is turned off when the advantageous section ends, it is the same as when the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off in the first embodiment. It has the action effect (action effect 2) of.

In addition, the end condition of the advantageous section is that the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, and the net increase number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds the predetermined predetermined number. Conditions other than the above may be used, for example, the AT ends, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the end of the AT (for example, the number of games reaches the specified number of games, the predetermined combination is won, the predetermined combination). When the number of winnings reaches the specified number of times, the predetermined number of winnings or the predetermined number of rolls is stopped, the number of stoppings of the predetermined winning combination or the predetermined number of winnings reaches the specified number of times, winning the end lottery of the advantageous section, etc.) A configuration in which the advantageous section ends, a configuration in which only one of these conditions is applied, or a configuration in which a plurality of these conditions are applied may be used.

[Action effect 6]
In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section (from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to the total number of medals used to set the number of bets in the advantageous section. It is possible to update the net increase number counter for counting the number of sheets obtained by subtracting the number of sheets), and the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section specified based on the value of the net increase number counter is predetermined. The number exceeds (in this embodiment, the value (2388) obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 from 2400 and adding the number (3) used for setting the number of bets). In this case, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section. If the calculated value obtained by adding the value for the number of medals paid out in the game and subtracting the value for the number of medals used to set the bet number is less than 0, the value of the net increase counter is used. After the start of the advantageous section, it is corrected to 0, and when the calculated value is 0 or more, the value of the net increased number counter is controlled to be updated so that the calculated value is the value of the net increased number counter. , The net increase in medals is counted starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest, and it is an advantageous section when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number based on the value of the net increase counter. Is configured to end and shift to the normal section.

According to this configuration, after the start of the advantageous section, when the net increase of medals up to the present starting from the time when the net increase of the game value is the smallest exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is terminated. Even if the net increase in medals starting from the start of the advantageous section does not exceed the specified number, it is advantageous if the net increase in medals after the number of medals starts to increase exceeds the specified number. Since the section ends, not only the net increase of medals in the advantageous section but also the net increase of medals after the start of the advantageous section can be limited to the range based on the specified number of medals.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the payout number value of medals to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game during the advantageous section when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process. , The payout number is added to the net increase number counter, and the number of medals used for the bet number is subtracted from the net increase number counter, that is, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section counted by the net increase number counter is in the advantageous section. In, the number is counted based on the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game, but the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is calculated by the player from at least the number of medals given to the player. It suffices if the medal used in the game is subtracted by setting it, and when the internal lottery allows the occurrence of a predetermined small winning combination that actually accompanies the awarding of the medal, and the player is allowed to win the small winning combination. If the prize cannot be awarded even though it is possible to generate the prize, the medal given is given to the player assuming that the prize for the small winning combination has occurred. It may be configured to count as a medal.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and the number of bets. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medals used in the setting of is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0. In the net increase number counter, the number of medals is increased or decreased. When is less than 0, the numerical value less than 0 is not counted, and only the numerical value exceeding 0 is counted. However, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the numerical value less than 0, that is, for games in the minus region. It may be configured to count the net increase in value. For example, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase number counter to 0 at the start of the advantageous section, and then, when the medals are paid out in the advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out is set to the net increase number counter. By repeating the process of subtracting the value for the number of medals from the net increase counter when the medals are used to set the number of bets, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section can be counted. , When the number of medals increased or decreased is less than 0 or more than 0, it can be counted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. However, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from the normal section exceeds the specified number. It may be configured to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section.

According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net increase of medals starting from the time other than the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is set. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the above, it is possible to simplify the control of determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. However, it is suggested that the main control unit 41 has shifted to the AT state by the AT status notification LED 12b after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section as an opportunity set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section, and the navigation notification. When the operation mode for increasing the number of medals is notified, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be shifted to when the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from the above is exceeded the specified number.

According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase number of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the AT status notification LED 12b makes the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number of medals starting from the time other than when it is suggested that the transition has been made and the operation mode for increasing the number of medals is notified by the navigation notification, the net increase number is not required. It is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. However, the main control unit 41 is set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. , When the AT status notification LED 12b suggests that the AT status has been entered, if the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from the specified number exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is shifted. good.

According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase number of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the medals by the navigation notification is performed. Regardless of whether or not the mode has been notified, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from the time other than when the AT status notification LED 12b suggests that the section has shifted to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 has an AT state in which the navigation notification is performed to notify the advantageous operation mode to the advantageous person when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery during the advantageous section, and the inside. It is a configuration that can be controlled to the control state related to AT including the precursor state in which the navigation notification is not performed even if the navigation target combination is won by lottery, and when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, Regardless of whether the control state related to AT is the AT state or not, when a prize is generated with the payout of medals, the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase number counter, and the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is obtained. However, when updating the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 is targeted for navigation by an internal lottery when the control state related to AT is a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous section. When the winning combination is won and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player and the number of medals increases, the increased amount is added to the net increase number counter, and the navigation target role is won by the internal lottery. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated and the medals do not increase in an operation mode advantageous to the player, the net increase number counter is not added, and the control state regarding AT is the AT state during the advantageous section. When the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the operation mode is advantageous for the player regardless of whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the medals are increased. The number of medals increased when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated may be added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section.

According to this configuration, in a precursory state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified in the advantageous section, even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, when the number of medals actually increases, the net increase number counter is used. If the medals cannot be increased, the medals are not added to the net increase counter, and in the AT state where the operation mode advantageous to the player is notified in the advantageous section, the navigation target role is selected by the internal lottery. The net increase counter is added regardless of whether or not the number of medals actually increased when the player wins, and if the player can increase the number of medals, the number of medals actually increased. Regardless of whether or not, by adding the net increase number counter, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being intentionally extended, and if the player cannot surely increase the number of medals, the medal will actually be awarded. By adding the net increase number counter only when the number increases, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, when updating the net increase number counter, if the control state related to AT is a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous section, the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, and the number increases when the number of medals increases. When the minutes are added to the net increase number counter and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, but the medals do not increase, the net increase number counter is not added and the control state related to AT is the AT state during the advantageous section. In addition, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the increase in medals when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not the medals have increased. Is added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 is in the advantageous section regardless of which control state the control state regarding AT is. When the lottery result of the internal lottery is a predetermined small winning combination in which the predetermined operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals does not change, it is operated in the predetermined operation mode and whether or not the number of medals is increased. Instead, the increase in medals when operated in a predetermined operation mode may be added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section.

According to this configuration, in the advantageous section, if the player can increase the number of medals, the advantage section can be added by adding the net increase number counter regardless of whether or not the number of medals has actually increased. Can be prevented from being intentionally stretched.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number. In the AT state management process, it is first determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter has reached the upper limit number of games. , When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed without determining whether or not the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and the advantageous section is determined. It is a configuration to be terminated.

According to this configuration, when it is established that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games as the end condition of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Since it is not necessary, it is possible to simplify the control for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number of sheets.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and that the net increase in the number of advantageous sections exceeds a predetermined predetermined number. In the AT state management process, it is first determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the maximum number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has reached the maximum number of games. If not, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number of sheets.

According to this configuration, in the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, so that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section is terminated. In this case, it is possible to omit the control related to the determination of whether or not the net increase in the number of advantageous sections exceeds the specified number, which is more complicated than the control related to the determination of whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. ..

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 first determines whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games. In this case, it is configured to determine whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. However, in the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, which is advantageous. When the net increase number in the section does not exceed the specified number, it may be configured to determine whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games.

According to this configuration, the frequency with which the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number can be higher than the frequency with which the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of the number of games. Can be omitted.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and that the net increase in the number of advantageous sections exceeds a predetermined predetermined number. Is configured to end the advantageous section when is established, and when both the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section game is established. Performs the same advantageous section data initialization process as when the number reaches the upper limit of the number of games or when the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and common data (data related to the advantageous section) is obtained. It is a configuration to initialize.

According to this configuration, when both the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the number of advantageous section games is the upper limit in the advantageous section. Since the common data is initialized when either the number of games is reached or the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, only one condition is satisfied when both conditions are satisfied. It is possible to prevent a difference in the advantage between the case and the case.

For example, if it is only established that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section as the first condition and the advantageous section ends, the data corresponding to the first condition is initialized and the second condition is as follows. When the net increase in the advantageous section only exceeds the specified number and the advantageous section ends, both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the configuration for initializing the data corresponding to the second condition. If the data corresponding to the first condition and the data corresponding to the second condition are initialized when the advantageous section ends, the game is more than when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Although it may be disadvantageous to the person, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the advantageous section, the same data as when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the advantageous section is used. By configuring the initialization, it is possible to prevent a difference in advantage between the case where both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied and the case where either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. can.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games in the AT state management process, and the net increase in the number of advantageous sections exceeds a predetermined predetermined number. The configuration is such that the advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the conditions is satisfied.

According to this configuration, since the advantageous section ends when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a long period of time and when the advantageous section does not continue for a long period of time. Even so, if the number of medals increases sharply in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, so that it is possible to prevent the advantage in the advantageous section from increasing excessively. ..

In the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment shifts the control state related to AT to the AT state when the AT state start condition is satisfied, and controls state data (lights up) in the output buffer of the AT state notification LED 12b. ) Is set, and then the navigation display of the navigation notification is controlled to be displayed on the game assist display 12 by the instruction setting process. In a game in which the state notification LED 12b is configured to start lighting and the AT status notification LED 12b suggests that the AT state has been entered, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the number of medals is notified by the navigation notification. In this case, it is suggested that the AT state notification LED 12b shifts to the AT state at the same timing as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the number of medals by the navigation notification.

According to this configuration, in a game in which it is suggested that the AT state notification LED 12b has shifted to the AT state, when the operation mode for increasing the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means, the medals are increased by the navigation notification. Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R operation mode is notified at the same timing as the AT status notification LED12b indicates that the AT status has been entered. The operation modes of 8L, 8C, and 8R can be recognized at the same time.

In this embodiment, it is suggested that the main control unit 41 shifts to the AT state by the AT state notification LED 12b at the same timing as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that increase the medals by the navigation notification is notified. However, in a game in which it is suggested that the AT state notification LED 12b has shifted to the AT state, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. It may be configured to start lighting the AT status notification LED 12b before the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals by the navigation is notified to suggest that the AT status has been entered.

According to this configuration, in a game in which it is suggested that the AT status notification LED 12b has shifted to the AT state, the navigation is notified when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. The AT status notification LED 12b suggests that the AT status has been entered before the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase the medals by the notification are notified. In addition, it is possible to recognize the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals in the game.

In this embodiment, it is suggested that the main control unit 41 shifts to the AT state by the AT state notification LED 12b at the same timing as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that increase the medals by the navigation notification is notified. However, in a game in which it is suggested that the AT state notification LED 12b has shifted to the AT state, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. After the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation, the AT status notification LED 12b may be started to light to suggest that the AT status has been entered.

According to this configuration, in a game in which it is suggested that the AT status notification LED 12b has shifted to the AT state, the navigation is notified when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. Since it is suggested that the AT status notification LED 12b has shifted to the AT state after the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the notification, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medals are used. After the operation mode is notified, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which it is suggested that the AT state has been entered.

[Action effect 7]
The slot machine of configuration 1-1 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
At least a net increase counting means (net increase counter) that counts the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value (medals) given to the player.
When the net increase in the game value up to the present starting from the uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section and shifting to the normal section, and
Equipped with
The opportunity set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section is characterized by the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section.
According to this feature, the starting point for counting the net increase in the game value for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the starting point is for games other than when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous interval based on the net increase in value, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the end condition of the advantageous interval.

The slot machine of configuration 1-2 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
Derived control means (main control unit 41) that controls to derive the display result,
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
Suggestion means (AT status notification LED12b) suggesting that the section has moved to an advantageous section, and
An operation mode notification means (navigation notification) that can notify an operation mode that increases the game value (medal), and
A net increase counting means (net increase counter) that counts the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value given to the player at least.
When the net increase in the game value up to the present starting from the uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section and shifting to the normal section, and
Equipped with
The opportunity set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section is suggested to have shifted to the advantageous section by the suggestion means after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the game is played by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification). It is characterized by the fact that the operation mode for increasing the utility value (medal) is notified.
According to this feature, the starting point for counting the net increase in the game value for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is determined by the above-mentioned suggestion means. The end condition of the advantageous section is determined based on the net increase in the game value starting from the time other than when the operation mode for increasing the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means. Since it is not necessary, the control related to the determination of the end condition of the advantageous section can be simplified.

The slot machine of configuration 1-3 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
Derived control means (main control unit 41) that controls to derive the display result,
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
Suggestion means (AT status notification LED12b) suggesting that the section has moved to an advantageous section, and
An operation mode notification means (navigation notification) that can notify an operation mode that increases the game value (medal), and
A net increase counting means (net increase counter) that counts the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value given to the player at least.
When the net increase in the game value up to the present starting from the uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section and shifting to the normal section, and
Equipped with
The trigger set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section is whether or not the operation mode for increasing the game value (medal) is notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification) after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. Regardless of this, it is characterized in that the suggestion means (AT state notification LED12b) suggests that the section has shifted to the advantageous section.
According to this feature, the starting point for counting the net increase in the game value for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation mode notification means is used. Regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing the game value is notified, the advantageous section is based on the net increase in the game value starting from a point other than when it is suggested by the suggestion means that the section has shifted to the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the end condition of the advantageous section.

The slot machine of configuration 1-4 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
At least a net increase counting means (net increase counter) that counts the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value (medals) given to the player.
After the start of the advantageous section, if the net increase in the game value from the time when the net increase in the game value (medals) decreases the most to the present exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is entered. The means of ending the advantageous section to be transferred,
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, after the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated when the net increase in the game value exceeds a predetermined number starting from the time when the net increase in the game value is the smallest. Since the transition is made to the normal section, even if the net increase in the game value starting from the start of the advantageous section does not exceed the predetermined number, the net increase in the game value after the game value starts to increase If the number exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous section ends, so not only the net increase in the game value during the advantageous section but also the net increase in the game value after the start of the advantageous section is within the range based on the predetermined number. Can be limited to.

In the configurations 1-1 to 1-4, the net increase in the game value is at least the game value given to the player minus the game value used by the player for the game. It is good if the prize is actually allowed to be generated with the addition of the game value, and the player is in a situation where the prize can be generated, but the prize cannot be generated. The game value given on the assumption that a prize has been won may be counted as the game value given to the player.
Further, in configurations 1-1 to 1-4, when the net increase in the game value is less than 0, the net increase counting means counts the numerical value below 0, that is, the net increase in the game value in the minus region. It may be a configuration that counts, or a configuration that maintains 0 when the net increase in the game value is less than 0, that is, a configuration that does not count the net increase in the game value in the negative region.

[Action effect 8]
The slot machine of configuration 2-1 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
Derived control means (main control unit 41) that controls to derive the display result,
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
An operation mode notification means (navigation) capable of notifying a specific operation mode when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a specific decision result (navigation target combination) in which a specific operation mode that increases the game value (medal) changes. Notification) and
A net increase counting means (net increase counter) that counts the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value given to the player at least.
When the net increase in the game value counted by the net increase counting means exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section and shifting to the normal section, and the advantageous section ending means.
Equipped with
The advantageous section is a precursory section (precursor state) in which the specific operation mode is not notified even if the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific determination result (navigation target combination), and a section that shifts after the precursory section. The notification section (AT state) in which the specific operation mode is notified when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific determination result (navigation target combination) is included.
The net increase counting means is
In the precursory section (precursor state), the determination result of the advance determination means becomes the specific determination result (navigation target role), and when the game value (medal) increases by being operated in the specific operation mode, the increased amount is the game value. If the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific determination result in the precursory section and the game value does not increase without being operated in the specific operation mode, add the net increase of the game value. figure,
When the determination result of the advance determination means becomes the specific determination result (navigation target combination) in the notification section (AT state), whether or not the game value (medal) is increased by operating in the specific operation mode. Regardless, it is characterized in that the increase in the game value when operated in a specific operation mode is added to the net increase in the game value.
According to this feature, in the precursory section where the specific operation mode is not notified, the net increase in the game value is added when the game value actually increases even if the specific decision result is obtained, and the game value is increased. If this is not possible, the net increase in the game value is not added, and in the notification section where the specific operation mode is notified, whether or not the game value actually increased when the specific decision result is obtained. Regardless of the situation, the net increase in the game value is added, and if the player can increase the game value, regardless of whether or not the game value actually increases. By adding the net increase in the game value, the game value is actually increased if the player cannot surely increase the game value while preventing the advantageous section from being intentionally extended. By adding the net increase in the value for the game only when it increases, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

It should be noted that in the configuration 2-1 the net increase counting means also has a configuration in which when the net increase in the game value is less than 0, the numerical value below 0 is counted, that is, the net increase in the game value in the negative region is counted. Alternatively, a configuration in which 0 is maintained when the net increase in the game value is less than 0, that is, a configuration in which the net increase in the game value in the negative region is not counted may be used.

The slot machine of configuration 2-2 is the slot machine described in configuration 2-1.
In the net increase counting means, the predetermined operation mode in which the determination result of the advance determination means increases the game value (medal) does not change in both the precursor section (precursor state) and the notification section (AT state). In the case of (predetermined small winning combination), the increase in the game value when operated in the predetermined operation mode is the game value regardless of whether or not the game value is increased by the operation in the predetermined operation mode. It is characterized by adding to the net increase of.
According to this feature, if the player can increase the game value, the net increase in the game value can be added regardless of whether or not the game value has actually increased. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being intentionally extended.

[Action effect 9]
The slot machine of configuration 3-1 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
Advantageous section when at least one of the first condition (the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games) and the second condition (the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number) is satisfied in the advantageous section. And the advantageous section ending means to end and shift to the normal section,
Equipped with
The advantageous section ending means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the second condition is not satisfied or not. It is characterized by ending the advantageous section and shifting to the normal section.
According to this feature, when the first condition is satisfied, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, control related to the determination of whether or not the second condition is satisfied is performed. Can be simplified.

The slot machine of configuration 3-2 is the slot machine described in configuration 3-1.
A game number counting means (advantageous section game number counter) that counts the number of games,
At least a net increase counting means (net increase counter) that counts the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value (medals) given to the player.
Equipped with
The first condition is that the number of games exceeds a predetermined value (the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500), that is, the number of advantageous section games exceeds 1499).
The second condition is characterized in that the net increase in the game value exceeds a specific value (the net increase exceeds the specified number (2388)).
According to this feature, it is possible to omit the complicated control for determining whether or not the net increase in the game value exceeds the specific value, rather than the control for determining whether or not the number of games exceeds a predetermined value. ..

The slot machine of configuration 3-3 is the slot machine described in configuration 3-1.
A game number counting means (advantageous section game number counter) that counts the number of games,
A net increase counting means (net increase counter) that counts the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value given to the player at least.
Equipped with
The first condition is that the net increase in the game value exceeds a specific value (the net increase exceeds the specified number (2388)).
The second condition is characterized in that the number of games exceeds a predetermined value (the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500), that is, the number of advantageous section games exceeds 1499).
According to this feature, since the frequency of the net increase in the game value exceeding the specific value is higher than the number of games exceeding the predetermined value, it is possible to omit the control related to the determination of the infrequent event. ..

In the configurations 3-2 and 3-3, the net increase in the game value is at least the game value given to the player minus the game value used by the player for the game. It is good if the prize is actually allowed to be generated with the addition of the game value, and the player is in a situation where the prize can be generated, but the prize cannot be generated. The game value given on the assumption that a prize has been won may be counted as the game value given to the player.
Further, in the configurations 3-2 and 3-3, the net increase counting means counts the numerical value less than 0 when the net increase of the game value is less than 0, that is, the net increase of the game value in the minus region. It may be a configuration that counts, or a configuration that maintains 0 when the net increase in the game value is less than 0, that is, a configuration that does not count the net increase in the game value in the negative region.

[Action effect 10]
The slot machine of configuration 4-1 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
Advantageous section when at least one of the first condition (the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games) and the second condition (the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number) is satisfied in the advantageous section. And the advantageous section ending means to end and shift to the normal section,
Initialization means for initializing data related to advantageous sections (processing for initializing at the end of advantageous sections in AT state management processing),
Equipped with
The initialization means has data common to the case where both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the advantageous section and one of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (data regarding the advantageous section). It is characterized by initializing.
According to this feature, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the advantageous section, the data common to the case where either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the advantageous section is initialized. It is possible to prevent a difference in advantage between the case where both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied and the case where either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied.

The slot machine of configuration 4-2 is the slot machine according to configuration 4-1.
A game number counting means (advantageous section game number counter) that counts the number of games,
At least a net increase counting means (net increase counter) that counts the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value (medals) given to the player.
Equipped with
The first condition is that the number of games exceeds a predetermined value (the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500), that is, the number of advantageous section games exceeds 1499).
The second condition is characterized in that the net increase in the game value exceeds a specific value (the net increase exceeds the specified number (2388)).
According to this feature, since the advantageous section ends when the number of games exceeds a predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a long period of time, and even if the advantageous section does not continue for a long period of time. Since the advantageous section ends even when the game value suddenly increases in the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

In the configurations 4-1 and 4-2, the net increase in the game value is at least the game value given to the player minus the game value used by the player for the game. It is good if the prize is actually allowed to be generated with the addition of the game value, and the player is in a situation where the prize can be generated, but the prize cannot be generated. The game value given on the assumption that a prize has been won may be counted as the game value given to the player.
Further, in the configurations 4-1 and 4-2, the net increase counting means counts the numerical value less than 0 when the net increase of the game value is less than 0, that is, the net increase of the game value in the minus region. It may be a configuration that counts, or a configuration that maintains 0 when the net increase in the game value is less than 0, that is, a configuration that does not count the net increase in the game value in the negative region.

[Action effect 11]
The slot machine of configuration 5-1 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
Derived control means (main control unit 41) that controls to derive the display result,
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
Suggestion means (AT status notification LED12b) suggesting that the section has moved to an advantageous section, and
An operation mode notification means capable of notifying an operation mode that increases the value for a game,
Equipped with
In a game in which it is suggested that the suggestion means has shifted to an advantageous section, when an operation mode for increasing the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means, the game value is increased by the operation mode notification means. It is characterized in that it is suggested by the suggestion means that the section has shifted to the advantageous section before the operation mode is notified.
According to this feature, in a game in which it is suggested that the suggestion means has shifted to an advantageous section, when an operation mode for increasing the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means, the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means. Since it is suggested by the suggestion means that the operation mode has been shifted to the advantageous section before the operation mode is notified, the game value is increased in the game after recognizing that the operation mode has been shifted to the advantageous section. It is possible to recognize the operation mode.

The slot machine of configuration 5-2 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
Derived control means (main control unit 41) that controls to derive the display result,
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
Suggestion means (AT status notification LED12b) suggesting that the section has moved to an advantageous section, and
An operation mode notification means capable of notifying an operation mode that increases the value for a game,
Equipped with
In a game in which it is suggested that the suggestion means has shifted to an advantageous section, when an operation mode for increasing the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means, the game value is increased by the operation mode notification means. It is characterized in that after the operation mode is notified, it is suggested by the suggestion means that the section has shifted to the advantageous section.
According to this feature, in a game in which it is suggested that the suggestion means has shifted to an advantageous section, when an operation mode for increasing the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means, the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means. Since it is suggested by the suggestion means that the operation mode for increasing the game value has been notified, it is suggested at what timing the operation mode for increasing the game value has been notified. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not it is done.

The slot machine of configuration 5-3 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
Derived control means (main control unit 41) that controls to derive the display result,
Advantageous section transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and
Suggestion means (AT status notification LED12b) suggesting that the section has moved to an advantageous section, and
An operation mode notification means capable of notifying an operation mode that increases the value for a game,
Equipped with
In a game in which it is suggested that the suggestion means has shifted to an advantageous section, when an operation mode for increasing the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means, the game value is increased by the operation mode notification means. It is characterized in that it is suggested by the suggestion means that the operation mode has shifted to the advantageous section at the same timing as the timing at which the operation mode is notified.
According to this feature, in a game in which it is suggested that the suggestion means has shifted to an advantageous section, when an operation mode for increasing the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means, the game value is notified by the operation mode notification means. Since it is suggested that the suggestion means has shifted to the advantageous section at the same timing as the timing at which the operation mode for increasing the game is notified, it is possible to simultaneously recognize the shift to the advantageous section and the operation mode for increasing the game value. can.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of Example 1 has the same effect as that described in Example 1. Further, the modified example exemplified for Example 1 can also be applied to Example 2.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 12 Game auxiliary display 12a Advantageous section notification LED
41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
An advantageous section transition means for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player,
A net increase counting means for counting the net increase in the game value obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player for the game from the game value given to the player.
At least one of the first condition that is satisfied in the advantageous section and the second condition that is satisfied based on the fact that the net increase in the game value up to the present starting from the specific opportunity after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. When the condition of is satisfied, the advantageous section ending means for terminating the advantageous section and shifting to the normal section, and
Equipped with
The specific opportunity is an opportunity for the net increase in the game value to increase from the situation where the net increase in the game value is smaller than 0 after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section .
The advantageous section ending means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied, a net increase in the game value is given. After the process of updating based on the game value and the used game value is performed, it is determined whether or not the second condition is satisfied based on the net increase in the updated game value, and the first condition is determined. When it is determined that one condition is satisfied, the process of updating the net increase in the game value is not performed, nor is it determined whether or not the second condition is satisfied, and the advantageous section is terminated. A slot machine that shifts to the normal section .

Images